Quarterlytics / Residential Construction / The Berkeley Group

The Berkeley Group

bkg · LSE
Claim this profile
Ticker bkg
Exchange LSE
Sector
Industry Residential Construction
Employees 1001-5000
← All annual reports
FY2014 Annual Report · The Berkeley Group
Sign in to download
Loading PDF…
ANNUAL REPORT 2014

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
I
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

ABOUT THIS REPORT

STRATEGIC REPORT

FINANCIALS

Welcome to the Annual Report of The Berkeley 
Group Holdings plc (“the Berkeley Group” or 
“Berkeley”), a publicly owned company, listed 
on the London Stock Exchange within the FTSE 
250. The Strategic Report explains Berkeley’s 
strategy, business model, performance and 
outlook. The Governance section covers the 
role and activities of the Board in running the 
business and their remuneration. The detailed 
Financials, accompanied by a report from the 
Group’s auditors, complete the Annual Report.

Business model 
Performance highlights 
Chairman’s statement 
Managing Director’s statement 
What we do 
Where we operate  
How we operate: managing risk 
How we operate: Our Vision  
Trading and financial review and outlook 

GOVERNANCE

Board of Directors 
Corporate governance report 
Audit Committee report 
Directors’ remuneration report 
Directors’ report 

4
5
6
7
10
16
20
27
38

48
50
54
56
81

Independent Auditors’ report on the  
consolidated financial statements 
Consolidated income statement  
Consolidated statement of  
comprehensive income 
Consolidated statement of  
financial position 
Consolidated statement of  
changes in equity 
Consolidated cash flow statement 
Notes to the consolidated  
financial statements 
Company balance sheet 
Notes to the Company  
financial statements 
Five year summary and definitions 
Shareholder information 

86
89

89

90

91
92

93
115

116
120
121

THE CORNICHE, ALBERT EMBANKMENT (COMPUTER GENERATED IMAGE)
COVER: EMERALD SQUARE, ROEHAMPTON

THE BERKELEY
GROUP

Berkeley builds homes and neighbourhoods  
in its core markets of London and the 
 South of England. Its knowledge, expertise  
and proven track record, with over thirty years of 
experience in this market, gives it an unrivalled  
ability to deliver new homes and communities.

Berkeley will continue to forward sell its 
developments wherever possible, maintaining  
a strong balance sheet and keeping financial risk  
low in order to mitigate the operating risks of  
delivery. It will carefully allocate capital to the  
right projects at the right time, matching supply  
to demand wherever it can. 

The Berkeley Group is honoured this year to have been awarded the UK’s highest 
accolade for business success – the Queen’s Award for Sustainable Development 
2014. This is the second time the group has been recognised having previously 
won the award in 2008, the first housebuilder to have achieved this. 

Proud to be a member of the Berkeley Group of Companies

01

 
 
S
T
R
A
T
E
G
I
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

STRATEGIC 
REPORT

LONG-TERM THINKING AT  
THE HEART OF OUR SUCCESS

l

.
y
n
o
e
v
i
t
a
c
d
n

i

i

d
n
a
d
e
t
a
r
e
n
e
g
r
e
t
u
p
m
o
c
s
i

n
w
o
h
s
e
g
a
m

I

ROYAL ARSENAL RIVERSIDE (COMPUTER GENERATED IMAGE)

02

03

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  STRATEGIC REPORTBERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  STRATEGIC REPORT 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
BUSINESS MODEL

2014 PERFORMANCE HIGHLIGHTS

The Berkeley Group builds homes and neighbourhoods. 

We seek to create beautiful, successful places. These places range in size from a few 
homes in market towns to complex, mixed-use urban regeneration schemes of  
over 4,000 homes all built with safety, sustainability and quality at their heart.  
Berkeley aims to run the business for long-term success. Its strategy rests  
on five key principles, with four clear outputs:

Berkeley has committed to return £13 per share to shareholders by  
September 2021. 164 pence per share (£215 million) has already been paid,  
a further 90 pence per share (£122 million) has been declared for payment  
in September 2014, leaving 180 pence per share (£243 million) to return  
by the first milestone of 434 pence by September 2015.

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
I
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

ST R ATEG Y

P ERF OR MANC E

CYCLICAL MARKET 
We recognise that the property  
market is inherently cyclical. 

UNDERSTANDING RISK 
Weunderstandthattherearesignificant
operational risks in successfully identifying, 
designing, building and selling homes  
and creating new places.

KNOWING OUR MARKET 
 We operate in London and the South 
of England, markets that we know and 
understand. Given the importance of 
relationships and local knowledge we 
believe that this gives us a competitive 
advantage and enables us to deliver new 
places which are socially, environmentally 
and economically successful.

SOUND FINANCIALS
Weaimtokeepfinancialrisklow,by
maintaining a strong balance sheet, 
forward selling new homes where  
possible and carefully allocating funds  
to the right projects at the right time.

AUTONOMY
We have recognised brands and  
autonomous operational teams who carefully  
manage each individual scheme, regardless 
of size, to a bespoke design, and embrace  
Berkeley’s core values in their approach.

OU R  VI SI ON

“Our Vision” is Berkeley’s framework designed to implement this strategy and help all of our people contribute  
to the success of the business by giving them a clear set of commitments in every area of the business.

This is explained in more detail on pages 27 to 37 of the Strategic Report.

OU T PUT S

 SHAREHOLDERS
We have a clear plan to return 
£13 per share (over £1.7 billion) by 
2021 and to retain a successful, 
sustainable business thereafter. 
Our 2014 Performance 
Highlights opposite show that 
we are on track to achieve this.

SOCIETY
 We are building new homes 
to help the country meet the 
housing shortfall and creating 
places characterised by the 
quality of their design, public 
realm, transport and access  
to jobs and amenities.

PEOPLE
 Our approach creates 
jobsinouroffices,onour
developments and in our 
supply chain, some 4.5 for 
every new home built. We have 
engaged a loyal and dedicated 
workforce within Berkeley.

PLACES
 We aim to deliver sustainable 
communities which endure 
long after our work is complete, 
and our engagement with local 
people through the Berkeley 
Foundation supports this.

PROFIT BEFORE TAX

EARNINGS PER  SHARE

£380.0 million

£110.3m
£136.2m
£214.8m
£270.7m
£380.0m

2010
2011
2012
2013
2014

221.8 pence

RETURN ON EQUITY

NET ASSET VALUE  PER SHA RE

1,066 pence

27.5%

13.3%
15.3%
21.2%
22.4%
27.5%

2010
2011
2012
2013
2014

OUTLOOK

CASH DUE ON FORWARD SALES

GROSS MARGIN IN LA ND HOLDI NGS

£2,274 million

£648m
£814m
£1,056m
£1,453m
£2,274m

2010
2011
2012
2013
2014

£3,014 million

60.0p
72.1p
121.0p
160.0p
221.8p

637p
709p
839p
1,009p
1,066p

£2,038m
£2,304m
£2,580m
£2,852m
£3,014m

2010
2011
2012
2013
2014

2010
2011
2012
2013
2014

2010
2011
2012
2013
2014

04

05

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  STRATEGIC REPORTBERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  STRATEGIC REPORT 
CHAIRMAN’S STATEMENT

MANAGING DIRECTOR’S STATEMENT

I am proud of the role that 
Berkeley has played in 
generating economic growth 
and its wider contribution  
to our society

Berkeley’s vision is to be a  
world-class business generating  
long-term value by creating  
successful, sustainable places 
where people aspire to live

TONY PIDGLEY CBE CHAIRMAN

ROB PERRINS MANAGINGDIRECTOR

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
I
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

Commenting on the results, Chairman 
Tony Pidgley said:

“Thesearestrongresultswhichreflectthe
current market conditions and Berkeley’s 
bold strategy to invest at the right point 
in the economic and housing cycle. Basic 
earnings per share have grown by 38.6% 
to 221.8 pence, of which 149 pence has 
been paid to shareholders as dividends  
in the year, and the estimated value of 
gross margin in our land holdings is now  
in excess of £3 billion.

The Board has declared a further interim 
dividend of 90 pence per share (£122 
million), payable on 26 September 2014 to 
shareholders on the register on 22 August 
2014. This means that 254 pence per share 
has been paid or committed to date, and 
leaves a further 180 pence per share in 
ordertomeetthefirstmilestoneofpaying
434 pence per share by September 2015. 
The Board considers that the Group is 
currently on track to achieve this target 
and is well positioned to meet the 
remaining milestones by September 2021.

The last year has seen a surge of 
confidencewithintheUKeconomy.
Housebuilders have been at the forefront 
of the return to growth, creating a 
feelgoodfactorwhichbenefitseveryone.
Their investment has underpinned 
the delivery of affordable homes and 
infrastructure for our communities. 
This is a result of a stable economic 
and political environment and strong 
inward investment. London in particular 
competes on a global stage and the 
strength of the market here is vitally 
important for maintaining momentum  
in the wider domestic market.

Looking to the future the housebuilding 
industry, supported by the stimulus of the 
Help to Buy scheme, has the capacity  
to increase further the supply of new 
homes across the country.  

Forward sales are critical to enable 
theindustrytocommitthesignificant
capital necessary to do this. Berkeley is 
building on all of its sites that have an 
implementable planning consent and we 
are employing over 11,000 people directly 
on our sites sustaining a further 10,000 
jobs indirectly in the supply chain. This 
year we have completed some 30% more 
homes than at the peak of the market in 
2007,andIamproudoftheroleBerkeley
has played in generating economic growth 
and its wider contribution to our society 
through the homes and places we create.

Berkeley’s achievements are testament to 
the skill and dedication of our employees, 
and to the commitment of our partners 
on our schemes and in the supply chain, 
andIwouldliketoexpressmythanksto
allofthem.IamdelightedthattheGroup
has been recently awarded the Queen’s 
Award for Enterprise for Sustainable 
Development 2014. This award recognises 
Berkeley’s approach to running its 
business for the long-term, to help ensure  
a better quality of life for everyone, now 
and for generations to come.

TheBoardisconfidentthatBerkeley
has the right plan to deliver long-term 
sustainable success, but remains alert 
to the inherently cyclical nature of the 
property market and the uncertainty 
surrounding future tax policy and political 
decision-making. Monetary policy and 
thefinancialstabilityofbanks,whichis
currently a concern of regulators, are both 
factorsinfluencingthehousingmarket
in the long-term. Provided any future 
increases in interest rates or regulation  
of mortgages are matched with future 
wages growth as the economy expands, 
the prospects for the housing market  
remain positive.”

DIVIDE ND

Further interim dividend of

90p per share 

payable in Sep 2014

LONG-TERM S TR ATE G Y

To return 

£1.7 billion 

in cash to shareholders

Looking forwards, we continue to see 
opportunities to acquire land that meet 
our hurdle returns. This will typically be 
characterised by long-term and complex 
development sites to which Berkeley can 
bring its expertise. The land already in 
our pipeline comprises a number of sites 
that match these criteria and the ongoing 
operational focus is to deliver this over  
thenextfiveyears.Ifthisisachieved, 
it has the potential to enhance the  
existing gross margin in the land bank 
by some £1.5 billion and help build a 
sustainable business.

Berkeleyhasfinishedtheyearwell,
deliveringastrongcashflowperformance,
growing its unrivalled land holdings 
through acquisition and optimisation, 
continuing to invest in inventory and 
securing additional forward sales. This 
givestheBoardtheconfidenceto
continue to invest and add value whilst 
never underestimating the risks inherent 
in a cyclical market.

Over the remainder of the current plan, 
the Board aims to deliver the targeted 
dividends from earnings while maintaining 
the balance sheet at least at its current 
level and the value in its land holdings 
above £3 billion.”

Commenting on the results, Managing 
Director Rob Perrins said:

“Berkeley has built and sold 3,742 new 
homes this year at an average selling  
price of £423,000, driving a 40.4% increase 
inpre-taxprofitsto£380.0millionand 
a rise in pre-tax return on equity from  
22.4% to 27.5%.

The Group remained ungeared throughout 
the year, with net cash rising from  
£44.7 million to £129.2 million after paying 
£195.2 million of dividends to shareholders 
and investing further in new land and 
construction. This investment and a 
favourable market have enabled us to build 
and sell over 15,000 new homes in London 
and the South of England over the last 
fiveyears,duringwhichperiodwehave
delivered some 10% of both the total private 
and affordable homes built in London.

Berkeley’s vision is to be a world-class 
business generating long-term value by 
creating successful, sustainable places 
where people aspire to live. These results 
are due to a unique combination of an 
entrepreneurial approach to land buying, 
a track record of working in partnership 
with local authorities to create great places, 
strongfinancialdiscipline,autonomous
management teams and above all a passion 
for proving how good new housing can be.

With cash due on forward sales now 
approaching £2.3 billion and estimated 
gross margin in its land holdings now 
in excess of £3 billion, the Board has 
visibility over its commitment to meet the 
remaining180penceofthefirstmilestone
through regular dividends. The land and 
planning now in place has extended this 
visibility to delivery of the second milestone 
payment of 433 pence by September 
2018 and Berkeley has made substantial 
inroads into the planning requirement 
on the land required to cover the third 
milestone payment of a further 433 pence 
by September 2021.

PERFORMANCE

Profitbeforetaxup

40.4% 

in the year

OUTLOOK

Estimated gross margin in  
land holdings 

£3,014 million 

at year end

06

07

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  STRATEGIC REPORTBERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  STRATEGIC REPORT 
BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  STRATEGIC REPORT

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  STRATEGIC REPORT

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
I
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

375 KENSINGTON HIGH STREET

08

09

 
WHAT WE DO

WHAT WE DO:
1: IDENTIFYING AND ACQUIRING LAND

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
I
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

“The Berkeley Group builds homes and neighbourhoods.  
We seek to create beautiful, successful places.

These places range in size from a few homes in market towns to  
complex, mixed-use urban regeneration schemes of over 4,000 homes,  
all built with safety, sustainability and quality at their heart.”

1 IDE NTIF YI N G  AN D A CQU I RIN G  L AN D

2 D ESIGNING AND  PLA NN IN G  N E W  H OM ES   A N D  PLA CES

3 BUILDING N E W HO M ES  AN D  PLA CES

4 MARK ETI N G A N D SE LLIN G  HO M ES

5 CUSTOMER SER VICE  A ND  S TEWAR D S HIP

Berkeley has invested over £1.5 billion in 
new land since 2009 when it set out a clear 
strategy to acquire land at the right point  
in the cycle.

EXPERIENCE
Experienced land teams across the business 
understand the Group’s focus on investing 
selectively in the right locations in our core 
markets of London and the South of England 
where there is underlying demand for new 
homes, good transport links and the scope  
to create successful new places.

POTENTIAL
The Group thrives on taking on complex, 
challenging,brownfieldlandwhichothers
shy away from, but only where there are the 
right commercial fundamentals, the potential 
to add value and where we have the vision 
to create something special through the 
development process.

CAREFUL APPRAISAL
We undertake a rigorous internal appraisal 
process to assess the opportunities and 
risks of potential acquisitions and deliver 
pre-authorisation at Board level of all  
land offers and again prior to exchange  
of contracts. 

AN ENTREPRENEURIAL APPROACH
An entrepreneurial approach, our  
financialstrengthandaflatmanagement
structure enable Berkeley to reach 
purchase decisions quickly and decisively, 
whichgivesconfidencethatwewilldeliver
on these decisions. We understand 
the varying requirements of vendors 
and landowners, whilst also considering 
innovative approaches to accessing new 
land such as joint ventures as in the case 
of St Edward, a partnership with Prudential.

NEW  LA ND

Berkeley has invested 

£1.5 billion 

in new land since 2009

1 

 The Corniche and Merano Residences,  
Albert Embankment

2  DemolitionworksatKidbookeVillage
3 

 Construction works at Royal Arsenal Riverside

1

10

11

2
2

3

3

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  STRATEGIC REPORTBERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  STRATEGIC REPORT 
WHAT WE DO:
2: DESIGNING AND PLANNING  
NEW HOMES AND PLACES

WHAT WE DO:
3: BUILDING NEW HOMES AND PLACES

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
I
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

Our business is about placemaking,  
not just housebuilding.

We aim to create places characterised  
by the quality of their design, public  
realm, transport links and access to jobs 
and amenities.

CONSULTATION
We use professional architects and  
leading consultants and engineers to 
design every new scheme individually, 
whether it consists of four or four thousand 
new homes, in consultation with local 
communities, and strive to deliver schemes 
which are of high quality, sensitive to their 
heritage and surroundings and meet the 
aspirations of our customers and local  
and national stakeholders.

SOCIAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL 
SUSTAINABILITY
We have addressed the challenge of 
understanding what makes a successful 
place by implementing a framework to 
promote quality of life and strength of 
community, which we now apply to our 
schemes. We have led the way in  
delivering environmentally sustainable 
living on large-scale developments.

PARTNERSHIPS
We engage closely with our partners  
in the local authorities and communities 
surrounding each of our sites to understand 
stakeholders’needs,reflectingthesein
our designs, and want to cement our 
reputation for quality and for delivering  
on our promises.

PLACEMA KIN G

We aim to create 
places characterised 
by the quality of 
design, public realm, 
transport and access 
to jobs and amenities.

1  Planning meeting at Abell & Cleland
2  Construction progress of Riverlight 
3 CGIofRiverlight

1

2

Berkeley is currently building on every one 
of its schemes that has an implementable 
planning consent.

INTENSIVE MANAGEMENT
Each of our developments is led by a 
dedicated project team responsible for all 
aspects of detailed design, quality, delivery, 
health and safety, commercial and technical 
works on their project.

The coordination of professional teams  
of consultants and subcontractors and 
strong communication throughout are 
critical in ensuring the smooth delivery  
of every project.

HEALTH AND SAFETY
Berkeley’s approach prioritises the health, 
safety and wellbeing of our people and  
our subcontractor teams on site with 
dedicated Health and Safety managers 
overseeing all of our developments.

CONSIDERATE CONSTRUCTION
Our reputation relies on all of our project 
teams engaging with surrounding 
communities, being a responsible and 
considerate neighbour, and working with 
our suppliers and contractors to complete 
our schemes on time and budget.

BUILDIN G

Berkeley is currently 
building on every 
one of its 65 
schemes that has 
an implementable 
planning consent.

3

12

13

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  STRATEGIC REPORTBERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  STRATEGIC REPORT 
WHAT WE DO:
4: MARKETING AND SELLING HOMES

WHAT WE DO:
5: CUSTOMER SERVICE AND STEWARDSHIP

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
I
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

Whetherfirst-timebuyers,families,
experienced investors, retailers, our 
partners in housing associations or 
providers of student accommodation, 
Berkeley strives to ensure that its 
customers receive an unparalleled  
service when buying from Berkeley.

CUSTOMER FOCUS
Sales teams across the business help  
ourcustomersfindtherighthometo 
suit their needs and have the knowledge 
and understanding to explain the 
intricacies of every development.

ASPIRATIONAL HOMES
We aim to forward sell our homes  
where possible to ensure that what we  
arebuildingreflectsthedemandfrom 
our customers and we have the  
flexibilitytoevolveourproductto 
meet their aspirations.

SELLI NG

Berkeley strives to  
ensure that its customers 
receive an unparalleled 
service when buying 
from Berkeley.

Customer satisfaction is the crucial 
measure of whether our homes and  
our service meet the aspirations of  
our customers.

CUSTOMER JOURNEY
Dedicated Customer Relationship 
Managers look after every stage of the 
customer journey and provide a level of 
care and service after completion which 
we expect to match the quality of our 
product across all of our schemes.

ESTATE MANAGEMENT
Successful places need the right long- 
term management strategy and we work 
closely with appointed managing agents 
to set the right tone for our schemes  
long after they have been completed.

CUSTOMER JOURN EY

Dedicated Customer 
Managers look after 
every stage of the 
customer journey across 
all of our schemes.

14

15

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  STRATEGIC REPORTBERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  STRATEGIC REPORT 
S
T
R
A
T
E
G
I
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

SITES IN  CONSTRUCTION

93%

26 sites with planning  
and in construction

NEW  LA ND

3

new sites acquired  
in 2014

WHERE WE OPERATE

“We operate in London and the South of England, markets that we know and understand.  
Given the importance of relationships and local knowledge, we believe that this gives us  
a competitive advantage to enable us to deliver new places which are socially,  
environmentally and economically successful.”

LONDON

SOUTH OF ENGLAND

35 34

5

15 36

26

10 32

18 17

4

10

33

12

3

2

1

23
9
8

13

8

16

37

28

4

7

6

5

2

20

27

22

38
11

39

3

24
1

29
6

14

7 
25

9

21

31

30

19

SITES IN  CONS TRU CTION

80%

39 sites with planning  
and in construction

NEW  LAN D

6

new sites acquired  
in 2014

LONDON UNDER CONST RUCT ION

1   190 Strand
2    375 Kensington High Street  

(including Homebase and Telereal)
3   Abell & Cleland House, Westminster
4   Battersea Reach
5   Beaufort Park, Hendon 
6   Brewery Wharf, Twickenham
7   Chambers Wharf, Southwark
8   Chelsea Creek / Imperial Wharf
9   The Corniche, Albert Embankment
10   Dickens Yard, Ealing
11   Durham Road, Wimbledon
12   Ebury Square, Belgravia
13   Fulham Reach, Hammersmith
14   Goodman’s Fields, Aldgate
15   High Road, Finchley
16   Hurlingham Gate, Fulham
17   Kew Bridge Road 
18   Kew Bridge West, Brentford

19   Kidbrooke Village
20   Langham Square, Putney
21   Marine Wharf, Deptford
22   Marryat Place, Wimbledon
23   Merano, Albert Embankment
24   One Blackfriars, Southwark
25   One Tower Bridge
26   One Victoria Road, Acton
27   Queen Mary’s Place, Roehampton
28   Riverlight, Battersea
29   Roman House, City of London
30   Royal Arsenal Riverside
31   Saffron Square, Croydon
32   Sir Alexander Close, Acton
33   Sovereign Court, Hammersmith
34   St Josephs, Mill Hill
35   Stanmore Place
36   The Avenue, Finchley
37   Vista, Battersea*

38   Wimbledon Hill Park
39   Woodberry Park

LOND ON  FUTURE S ITES

1   22-26 Albert Embankment*
2   Barnes, Richmond*
3   City Forum, City of London
4   Hogarth, Chiswick
5   Latchmere House, Richmond
6   London Dock, Wapping
7   Old Isleworth*
8   Prince Consort House, Albert Embankment*
9   South Quay Plaza, Docklands
10   White City*

* Sites purchased during the year

N O RTH A M P T O

B
U
C

K

I

N

G

H

A

E

H I R

S

N

CAMBRIDGESHIRE

5

E
R
HI
S
D
R
O
F
D
E
B

O

R

F
T
21

E

H

R D S HIRE

LONDON

ESSEX

W

O

R

C

E

S

T

24

E

R

S

H

I
R

E

WARWICKSHIRE

8

GLOUCESTERSHIRE

9

3

WILTSHIRE

OXFORDSHIRE

BERKSHIRE

18

M

S

H

I
R

E

13 4

2

1

1

17

22

7

19

11

14

KENT

23

6

10

20

SURREY

SOMERSET

HAMPSHIRE

15

2

WEST SUSSEX

EAST SUSSEX

12

16

OUT OF LONDON UNDER CONSTR UCTION

OUT OF LONDON FUTURE SITES

1   Ascot (2 sites)
2   Barns Green*
3   Bath*
4   Beaconsfield (2 sites)
5   Cambridge
6   Canterbury
7   Caterham
8   Cheltenham
9   Cirencester
10   Fleet
11   Gillingham
12   Gosport

13   High Wycombe
14   Holborough
15   Horsham
16   North Bersted
17   Oxshott
18   Reading
19   Sevenoaks
20   Shalford
21   St Albans
22   Tadworth
23   Tunbridge Wells
24   Worcester

1   Maidenhead
2   Taplow*

* Sites purchased during the year

16

17

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  STRATEGIC REPORTBERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  STRATEGIC REPORT 
 
WHERE WE OPERATE continued

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
I
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

PIPELINE

Berkeley’s pipeline now comprises some 11,000 plots on 13 sites where  
delivery is dependent on resolving technical constraints, challenges surrounding 
vacant possession and/or securing planning consent. 

SOUTHALL
The former Southall Gas Works is an 84 acre 
brownfield site with outline planning permission  
for redevelopment to create 3,750 new homes  
alongside a school, shops and offices, and is adjacent  
to a Crossrail station due to open in 2019.

BERKSHIRE

LONDON

4 13

11

12

1 3

2

6

7

SURREY

5

9

8

10

KENT

TH E  P IPE LINE

1     Battersea Gardens* 
2     Bracknell* 
3     Chambers Wharf, Southwark 
4   Hornsey* 
5     Kidbrooke Village 

6     Kingston* 
7     Ockham* 
8     Orpington* 
9   Royal Arsenal Riverside 
10   Sevenoaks* 

11     Southall* 
12     Westminster* 
13     Woodberry Park 

*Includessitescontractedduringtheyear

18

19

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  STRATEGIC REPORTBERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  STRATEGIC REPORT 
HOW WE OPERATE: MANAGING RISK

“There are significant operational risks in successfully identifying, designing, building  
and selling new homes and creating new places. To provide the best platform for the  
business to meet these challenges, we aim to keep financial risk low, by maintaining  
a strong balance sheet, forward selling new homes where possible and carefully  
allocating funds to the right projects at the right time.”

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
I
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

“Berkeley’s approach allows management to focus on taking the right decisions  
to deliver long-term success, and retain the flexibility to take advantage  
of any opportunities which arise in the short and medium term.”

OP ERATI NG  R IS K

FI NANCI AL  RISK

Risk management is embedded in the 
organisation at operating company, 
divisional and Group levels, with different 
types of risk requiring different levels  
and types of management response.

Berkeley’s framework for internal  
control,thecontextfortheidentification,
control and monitoring of risks faced by 
the Group, is set out within the Corporate 
Governance Report on page 52. 

The principal operating risks and our 
approach to mitigating them are described 
in more detail on pages 22 and 23. 

The principal operating risks faced by  
the Group include:

Inlightoftheseoperatingrisks,Berkeley
aimstokeepfinancialrisklow,andfinances
its operations through shareholder equity 
andhassignificantundrawnfacilities
available. The Group’s operations are  
insterling,andsothereisnosignificant
directcurrencyrisk.Itsmainfinancialrisks
are primarily:

LIQUIDITY RISK
The risk that suitable funding for the 
Group’s activities may not be available to it.

MARKET CREDIT RISK
The risk that counterparties (mainly 
customers) will default on their contractual 
obligations resulting in a loss to the Group. 
The Group’s exposure to credit risk is 
comprised of cash and cash equivalents 
and trade and other receivables.

MARKET INTEREST RATE RISK
TheriskthatGroupfinancingactivities 
areaffectedbyfluctuationsinmarket
interest rates.

The Board approves treasury policy  
and senior management control  
day-to-day operations. Relationships  
with banks and cash management are  
co-ordinated centrally. 

The treasury policy is intended to  
maintain an appropriate capital structure  
tomanagethefinancialrisksidentified 
and provide the right platform for the 
business to manage its operating risks.

ECO NOMIC 
CONDITIONS

REGU LATIO N

PLAN NI NG   
PR OCES S

R ETAI NI NG   
PEOPLE

SECUR ING   
SALES

MORTGAG E   
AVAILABIL I TY

ENVI R ONMENTAL 
AND   SOC I AL 
SU STAI NABI L IT Y

H EALT H  AN D   
SA FET Y

LAND   
AVAILABIL ITY

B UIL D  C OST   AND 
PR OGRAMME

PR ODU CT   
QUAL I TY

20

21

Winter Garden at Goodman’s Fields

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  STRATEGIC REPORTBERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  STRATEGIC REPORT 
HOW WE OPERATE: MANAGING RISK continued

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
I
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

R ISK  DESCRIPTION 

MITIGATI ON

RI SK  DESC RIPTI ON

MI TI GATI ON

ECONOMIC CONDITIONS
As a property developer Berkeley’s business, in the 
context of the wider housing market, is sensitive to 
changes in interest rates, unemployment and general 
consumerconfidence.Someofitscustomersarealso
sensitive to changes in the sterling exchange rate.

ChangestoeconomicconditionsintheUK,Europe
and worldwide may lead to a reduction in demand for 
housing which could impact on the Group’s ability to 
deliver its corporate strategy.

REGULATION
Adverse changes to Government policy on areas such 
as taxation, housing and environmental matters could 
restrict the ability of the Group to deliver its strategy.

Failure to comply with laws and regulations  
could expose the Group to penalties and 
reputational damage.

PLANNING PROCESS
Delays or refusals in obtaining commercially  
viable planning permissions on the Group’s land 
holdings could result in the Group being unable  
to develop the land it has purchased.

This could have a direct impact on the Group’s 
abilitytodeliveritsproductandonitsprofitability.

RETAINING PEOPLE
An inability to attract, develop, motivate and retain 
talented employees could have an impact on the 
Group’s ability to deliver its strategic priorities.

Failure to consider the retention and succession  
of key management could result in a loss of  
knowledge and competitive advantage.

SECURING SALES
An inability to match supply to demand in terms  
of product, location and price could result in missed 
sales targets and / or high levels of completed stock 
which in turn could impact on the Group’s ability to 
deliver its corporate strategy.

Berkeley’sbusinessstrategyreflectsthecyclicalnatureofpropertydevelopment.

Funds are carefully targeted at investing only in land which is underpinned by demand 
fundamentals that support a solid viability case even when markets are uncertain.

Levels of committed expenditure are carefully monitored against forward sales secured  
andbankfacilitiesavailable,withtheobjectiveofkeepingfinancialrisklowtomitigate 
the operating risks of delivery in uncertain markets.

The business is committed to operating at an optimal size, with a strong balance sheet,  
tomaintaintheflexibilitytoreactswiftly,whennecessary,tochangesinmarketconditions.

The effects of changes to Government policies at all levels are closely monitored and 
representations made where appropriate.

Berkeley’s experienced teams are well placed to interpret and implement new regulation  
at the appropriate time through direct lines of communication across the Group. Detailed 
policies and procedures are in place and these are communicated to all staff.

Full detailed planning and risk assessments are performed and monitored for each site 
without planning permission, both before and after purchase.

The planning status of all sites is reviewed at monthly divisional Board meetings and  
Main Board meetings.

The Group works closely with local communities in respect of planning proposals and 
stronglocalrelationshipsaremaintainedwithlocalauthoritiesandplanningofficers.

The Group is focused on the markets of London and the South of England in a planning 
environment which it understands and where it believes it therefore has a competitive advantage.

Remuneration packages are constantly benchmarked against the industry to ensure they 
remain competitive.

Succession planning is regularly reviewed at both divisional and Main Board level.

Close relationships and dialogue are maintained with key personnel.

Detailed market demand assessments of each site are undertaken before acquisition,  
and regularly during delivery of each scheme, to ensure that supply is matched to  
demand in each location.

Design, product type and product quality are all assessed on a site-by-site basis to ensure 
that they meet the target market and customer aspirations in that location.

The Group has a diverse range of developments with homes available at a broad range  
of property prices to appeal to a wide market. Forward sales are used to take the risk out 
ofthedevelopmentcyclewherepossible,therebyjustifyingthefinancialinvestmentin
each of the Group’s sites.

Completed stock levels are reviewed and debated at monthly divisional Board meetings 
and quarterly Main Board meetings.

MORTGAGE AVAILABILITY
Mortgage providers have been negatively impacted  
bythefinancialcrisisandthishasreducedtheirability 
to provide mortgages to potential purchasers.

Aninabilityofcustomerstosecuresufficient 
mortgagefinancecouldhaveadirectimpact 
on the Group’s transaction levels.

Berkeley has a broad product mix and customer base which reduces the reliance on 
mortgage availability across its portfolio.

The Group is participating in the Government backed mortgage indemnity scheme, NewBuy, 
on a number of its schemes and on the Government’s new Help to Buy scheme.

DepositsaretakenonallsalestomitigatethefinancialimpactontheGroupinthe 
event that sales do not complete due to a lack of mortgage availability.

ENVIRONMENTAL AND SOCIAL SUSTAINABILITY
Berkeley is hugely aware of the environmental  
and social impact of the homes and communities 
that it builds, both during the construction phase 
and on occupation by its customers.

Failure to address sustainability issues could  
affect the Group’s ability to acquire land, gain 
planning permission, manage sites effectively  
and respond to increasing customer demand  
for sustainable homes.

HEALTH AND SAFETY
Berkeley’s operations have a direct impact on the 
health and safety of its people, contractors and 
members of the public. Berkeley considers this  
to be an area of critical importance.

A lack of adequate procedures and systems to 
reduce the dangers inherent in the construction 
process increases the risk of accidents or site- 
relatedcatastrophes,includingfireandflood, 
which could result in serious injury or loss of life 
leadingtoreputationaldamage,financial 
penalties and disruption to operations.

LAND AVAILABILITY
An inability to source suitable land to maintain  
the Group’s land bank at appropriate margins in  
a highly competitive market could impact on the 
Group’s ability to deliver its corporate strategy.

BUILD COST AND PROGRAMME
Build costs are affected by the availability of  
skilled labour and the price and availability  
of materials, supplies and subcontractors.  
Changes to these prices and availability could 
impactontheprofitabilityofeachscheme.

PRODUCT QUALITY
Berkeley has a reputation for the high standards  
ofqualityofitsproduct.IftheGroupfailsto 
deliver against these standards and its wider 
development obligations, it could be  
exposed to reputational damage, as well as  
reduced sales and increased cost.

Our Vision provides the framework under which the Group’s approach to running a sustainable 
business is formalised. This provides a framework under which detailed commitments are set 
out to be adopted and embraced by all staff.

The Board has the responsibility of setting the Group’s direction in this area, to ensure  
that it is aligned with the Group’s strategy.

Specificcommitmentstodeliversustainablecommunities,minimisetheimpactofthe
homes that Berkeley builds and to manage the environmental and social impacts of 
Berkeley’s business form the bedrock of this approach. Environmental and Social 
Sustainability assessments are built into land purchases and planning applications.

Sustainability commitments during delivery include the use of environmental performance 
methodology,afocusonbrownfielddevelopmentandthemonitoringofcarbonemissions,
amongst others.

The Board has the responsibility of setting the Group’s Health and Safety strategy.

DedicatedHealthandSafetyteamsareinplaceineachdivisionandatHeadOffice.
Procedures, training and reporting are all regularly reviewed to ensure high standards  
are maintained, and comprehensive accident investigation procedures are in place.

The Group has implemented a number of initiatives to improve Health and Safety standards 
on site, with workshops held with contractors during the year.

Our Vision incorporates commitments in the area of Health and Safety which reinforce the 
Group’s focus on this. Adequate insurance is held to cover the risks inherent in large-scale 
construction projects.

Berkeley’s strategy is to acquire land opportunistically, where it meets its internal criteria 
for purchase.

Land acquisition is focused on Berkeley’s core markets of London and the South of England, 
markets which it understands and where it believes that the demand fundamentals are strong 
and hence it stands the best chance of securing viable planning consent.

Each land acquisition is subject to formal internal appraisal and approval processes both 
prior to the submission of a bid and again prior to exchange of contracts to give the 
Group the best chance to secure targeted land.

TheGroupmaintainsitslandholdingstomitigateagainstsignificantimpactsfrommarket
changes or delayed build activity. Berkeley has experienced land teams with strong market 
knowledge in its areas of focus.

TheGroupkeepsfinancialrisklowandmaintainstheliquiditytoenableittoremain
competitive when it bids for new land.

A procurement and programming strategy for each development is agreed by the 
divisional Board before site acquisition.

A further assessment of procurement and programming is undertaken and agreed by  
the divisional Board prior to the commencement of construction.

Build cost reconciliations and build programme dates are presented and reviewed in  
detail at divisional cost review meetings each month.

Detailed reviews are undertaken of the product on each scheme both during the 
acquisition of the site and throughout the build process to ensure that the quality of  
the product is maintained.

Customer Satisfaction surveys are undertaken on the handover of all private apartments, 
andfeedbackincorporatedinshapingthespecificationandqualityofsubsequentschemes.

The Group monitors its development obligations and recognises any associated liabilities 
which arise.

22

23

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  STRATEGIC REPORTBERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  STRATEGIC REPORT 
BERKELEYANNUALREPORT2014/STRATEGICREPORT

BERKELEYANNUALREPORT2014/STRATEGICREPORT

CASE STUDY – THE ‘BERKELEY DIFFERENCE’ AT:

GOODMAN’S FIELDS, ALDGATE

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
I
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

“Our vision for Goodman’s Fields  
is to create a new modern urban 
quarter for the City of London, with 
innovative architecture which is 
sensitive to the history of the area 
and the amenities that will make  
this a great place to live.”

LO CATI ON

NUMBER  OF  HO ME S

D EVELOPMENT  T YPES

LENGTH OF SCHEME

1,400

Private, affordable and  
student homes, hotel, shops, 
restaurants and offices 

10 years 

REI N TEGRATION

PUBLIC REALM

INVESTMENT IN ART

On buying the land in 2010 with planning 
consent, Berkeley chose to completely 
redesign the scheme with a focus on 
opening up the site by developing a series 
of serene open spaces for the community  
to enjoy and so reintroducing a lost  
quarter of the City.

An experienced team of planners and 
landscape architects, and a development 
plan to service homes, shops and 
restaurants from underground, has created 
high quality open spaces on over two acres 
of the seven-acre scheme, which beautify 
and complement the make-up of the site.

A competition of over 40 artists secured 
the commission for a series of sculptures to 
really bring the place to life. The winning 
artist chose horses as his subject matter  
to serve as a visual reminder of the leading 
role that horses have played in London’s 
rich history.

24

25
25

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  STRATEGIC REPORT 
HOW WE OPERATE:
OUR VISION

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
I
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

“We have recognised brands and autonomous operational teams who carefully manage each individual 
scheme, regardless of size, to a bespoke design, and embrace Berkeley’s core values in their approach.  
“Our Vision” is Berkeley’s framework designed to help all of our people contribute to the success  
of the business by giving them a clear set of commitments in every area of the business.”

OUR  VI SI ON
To be a world class business generating long-term value by  
creating successful, sustainable places where people aspire to live.

FI VE  FOCUS A RE AS

C USTOM ERS
Provide exceptional service  
to all of our customers and  
put them at the heart of  
our decisions.

HOME S
Develop individually  
designed, high quality  
homes with low  
environmental impact.

P LAC ES
Create great places  
where residents enjoy a  
good quality of life, now  
and in the future.

OPERATIONS 
Make the right long-term 
decisions whilst running the 
businessefficientlyandworking
with our supply chain.

OUR  PEOPLE
Develop a highly skilled workforce who run autonomous businesses, operate in a safe  
and supportive working environment, and contribute to wider society.

For Berkeley to achieve long-term success, 
the skills, commitment and approach of our 
people throughout the business are crucial. 
Berkeley needs to ensure that everyone 
has the right tools to enable them to work 
towards a common set of goals. 

This year we have developed and evolved our 
business framework, “Our Vision” (previously 
Vision2020). Our Vision sets out our company 
values and provides an operational framework 
withfivekeyfocusareasandaseriesofclear
strategic commitments to help empower  
our people and give them clear direction 
across every discipline of the business.

Berkeley’s culture informs the way we work, 
the way we lead the business, and what 
we deliver to our customers. This year we 
have reviewed and tested our values and 
definedthebehavioursthatbringthem
alive. These help explain to both new  
and existing employees what Berkeley 
expects of them and what they can expect  
of Berkeley. 

InMay2014welaunchedanewsetof
stretching commitments to achieve by 
April 2016. These were determined based 
on input from an external stakeholder 
panel and issues review, together with 

consultation with each of our autonomous 
companies and specialist committees. 

Weexpandoneachofthefivefocusareas
of Our Vision over the next few pages.

375 KENSINGTON HIGH STREET

26

27

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  STRATEGIC REPORTBERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  STRATEGIC REPORT 
HOW WE OPERATE: OUR VISION continued

CUSTOMERS

Provide exceptional service to all of our customers and put them at the heart of our decisions.

OUR APPR OACH

OU R HE A DLINE  COMMITMEN TS  F OR 2 01 4  –  2 016

We have set three stretching commitments in the 
area of Customers to further improve our approach:

–   Deliver world-class customer service measured 

though the Net Promoter Score

–   Launch an interactive way of communicating  

with our customers, ‘My Home Plus’

– MarketallourdevelopmentsintheUKfirst

Our customers are at the heart of all our decisions. 
We aim to understand their needs and consistently 
meet or exceed their expectations. The service 
weprovideisprofessional,efficientandhelpfulto
make the home buying process as straightforward 
and enjoyable as possible. Our levels of customer 
service aim to be comparable to other top brands. 
All our customers are provided with a commitment 
that when they buy a new home from Berkeley 
they can be safe in the knowledge that it is built to 
very high standards of design and quality, has low 
environmental impact and that they will enjoy an 
exceptional customer experience. Each customer 
receives tailored information relating to their 
purchase and has a dedicated point of contact 
throughout the customer journey. 

OUR PROGRESS IN 2012 – 2014

COMMITMENT

PROGRESS

Provide every customer with a Berkeley Customer Satisfaction Commitment

Provide user-friendly ‘quick start’ instructions and guides for running a home

Survey every customer to measure satisfaction and target that at least 95% of our customers  
would recommend us to a friend

Trainsalesstaffinsustainabilitysothattheyareabletosellthebenefitstocustomers

Produce a Berkeley Sustainable Living Guide in conjunction with NGOs for use in sales  
& marketing suites, at handover, as well as an interactive version of the Guide for our website

 Achieved   Partially achieved   Not achieved

 

 



 

 

TRAINING

REC OMMENDATI ONS

C UST OMER  SER VI CE

105 

accreditedInstitute 
of Customer Service  
courses for staff 

98% 

of customers would  
recommend us to  
a friend

1st 

housebuilder to achieve 
InstituteofCustomerService’s
ServiceMark (St James)

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
I
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

INSTITUTE OF CUSTOMER SERVICE
TheGroupjoinedtheInstituteof
CustomerService(ICS)during2014to
further improve service and to enable 
benchmarking of performance. A survey of 
our employees and some recent customers 
was undertaken, with Berkeley performing 
abovethebenchmarksetbyICSand
achieving its highest score for friendliness 
of staff. Several of our businesses have 
sinceimplementedaccreditedICStraining
focusing on customer service for all 
employees. To date around 105 training 
courses have been delivered covering 
more than 500 staff and extending beyond 
just customer-facing employees. We are 
delighted that our St James business 
becamethefirsthousebuildertoachieve
ServiceMark accreditation.

TRAINING
An intensive ‘Let’s Talk Sales’ training 
programme took place for all sales staff 
in summer 2013 and a number of online 
training modules were also launched. Along 
with training of existing employees, we have 
also run our second Sales Academy. This 
aims to bring talented individuals from other 
industries into the business and provides 
them with a structured training programme 
before they are placed in a role.

UK FIRST
This year we have opened new overseas 
salesofficesinBeijingandDubai.Whilst
overseas customers are important, 
bringinginwardinvestmentintotheUK,
werecognisethatUKpurchasersshould
have the opportunity to buy our homes. 
InAugust2013,aheadoftheMayoral
Concordat, we made a pledge to offer  
alldevelopmentsintheUKbefore
marketing overseas.

CUSTOMER SURVEYS
We use customer satisfaction surveys 
undertaken by an independent external 
agency to measure how well we are meeting 
our customers’ expectations. All of our 
private purchasers are asked to complete 
a survey, and this year 98% of our customers 
reported that they would recommend 
Berkeley to a friend (2013: 98%). We will 
begin to use the Net Promoter Score (NPS) 
as an indicator of customer satisfaction 
and will publish this in future years  
to benchmark ourselves out of sector 
against world-class companies.

SUSTAINABLE LIVING
We have a role to play in promoting 
sustainable lifestyles to residents and 
helping them to operate their home 
efficientlyandmakethebestuseof
local facilities. We also believe that this 
is something our customers want; in our 
2014 Customer Sustainability Survey it 
washighlightedthatenergyefficiency,
running costs and open spaces are 
important factors when customers are 
buying their new home. All developments 
now have a ‘Helping Create a Better 
Future: Our Guide to More Sustainable 
Living’ brochure which includes an 
insertshowingsite-specificsustainability
features. An interactive version of the 
brochure is available online to show what 
we incorporate into our developments 
and suggest ways that customers can live 
more sustainably.

i  Learn more about Customers at  
berkeleygroup.co.uk/our-vision

1

1  Sales staff at Goodman’s Fields
2  Highwood, Horsham 

2

28

29

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  STRATEGIC REPORTBERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  STRATEGIC REPORT 
HOW WE OPERATE: OUR VISION continued

HOMES

Develop individually designed, high quality homes with low environmental impact.

OUR APPR OACH

OU R HE A DLINE  COMMITMEN TS  F OR 2 01 4  –  2 016

Each of our homes and developments is bespoke  
andweusequalifiedarchitectstodesigneach
scheme. Attention to detail in design is paramount 
to ensure homes meet the needs of our customers 
andourspecificationsareplannedtomeetthe
varied needs of all types of homebuyers, from 
luxurious houses to key worker apartments. The 
impact on the environment throughout the lifetime  
of the home is considered during its design with an 
aim to minimise impacts and provide home owners 
with the opportunity to live more sustainably. The 
highqualityfinishwhichwedemandinournew
homes requires a skilled workforce and thorough 
checks before handover. 

We have set three stretching commitments in the 
area of Homes to continue to improve our approach:

– Enablefibrebroadbandonallournewhomes 

and provide community Wi-Fi

–  Guarantee space standards for all new homes

–   Launch a new R&D programme to utilise  
customer feedback and drive innovation  
through improved design

OUR PROGRESS IN 2012 – 2014

COMMITMENT

PROGRESS

Develop minimum design standards on all Berkeley homes including standards for sound  
insulation, space, storage and overheating

Carry out post-occupancy monitoring of electricity, water and gas/heat consumption in order to 
measurethesuccessofourdesignsandtoinfluencethedesignoffutureschemes

UndertakeR&DtounderstandtheimplicationsoftheGovernment’sproposedzerocarbon
standard on our future developments

Design all new homes to achieve at least Level 3 of the Code for Sustainable Homes









 Achieved   Partially achieved   Not achieved

HO ME WORKING

SU STAI NABI LI T Y

R ECY CL I NG

100% 

new homes designed  
for home working

100% 

newhomestobecertified 
to at least Code Level 3

93% 

completed homes provided 
with recycling facilities

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
I
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

2

3

1

1  Lime Grove Mews
2  Roehampton House
3  Wimbledon Hill Park

BESPOKE DESIGN
There is no generic Berkeley scheme. Every 
design is bespoke and we use architects on 
every project, something which is uncommon 
within the industry. Our designers range 
from world-famous architects like Foster 
+ Partners working on The Corniche on 
Albert Embankment, to smaller practices 
like BHP Harwood producing an intelligent 
designtorestoreamagnificentGradeII
listed building at St Joseph’s Gate in Mill Hill. 
We continue to promote good urban design 
across the industry through sponsorship of 
the London Festival of Architecture. 

PRE-PLANNING
The design of each project is scrutinised 
intensely at all stages. We have regular 
project design meetings to review the 
specificationinvolvingeachrelevantteam
at every level of the business. We use 
focusgroupstoinfluencefutureschemes
by asking potential residents about the 
designfeaturesandlevelofspecification
they would require. Whilst the key measure 
ofsuccessfuldesignissatisfiedcustomers,
we are proud to have been awarded a 

number of design awards to corroborate 
ourapproach.Thefivestorey,five
bedroom home at Lime Grove Mews won 
the coveted Grand Prix Award and the 
Best Family Home Award in the London  
Evening Standard’s 2013 Awards for its 
thoughtfuldesignandflexibleinteriors.

ATTENTION TO DETAIL
The quality which we demand in our new 
homes requires a skilled workforce and 
attention to detail. We use our marketing 
suites as the benchmark for build quality 
andfinishineachindividualhome.
Every area is thoroughly checked before 
handover to ensure that high standards 
are maintained. Electronic systems to 
manage post-handover maintenance have 
been introduced in areas of the business 
to assist with this process to ensure good 
record keeping and timely close-out. We 
have also undertaken studies of occupied 
homes to investigate aspects such as 
air quality with specialist monitoring 
equipment and air leakage through 
thermal imaging.

ENVIRONMENTAL PERFORMANCE
Inthelasttwelvemonths,morestringent
building regulations for energy have 
been introduced, but we are awaiting the 
implementationofsignificantchanges
arising from the Government’s Housing 
Standards Review. The Group provided 
a response to the consultation in autumn 
2013 supporting the intention to simplify 
the large and complex range of local and 
national standards, rules and codes that 
housebuilders face. On a site-by-site basis, 
we continue to reach high environmental 
standards. For example, some of the 
deepest ground source heat pump 
boreholes in London will provide up to  
60% of the heating demand at Riverlight  
in Nine Elms.

i  Learn more about Homes at  
berkeleygroup.co.uk/our-vision

30

31

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  STRATEGIC REPORTBERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  STRATEGIC REPORT 
S
T
R
A
T
E
G
I
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

SOCIAL SUSTAINABILITY 
During 2014 we have further developed 
and launched our framework for creating 
successful places. This sets out a structured 
approach to placemaking and applying the 
main ideas behind social sustainability to 
new housing and mixed-use developments. 
Thecriteriareflectissueswhichare
important to people and communities, 
such as links with neighbours, access to 
transport, feelings of safety, positive local 
identityandtheabilitytoinfluencewhat
goes on. The framework is now used in the 
design of all our new schemes, and those 
of 100 homes or more conduct formal 
workshops to debate and prioritise the key 
issues. Results from residents at our longer-
term developments have been positive; 
atWoodberryPark90%feelsatisfied
with their life overall (compared to 60% 
nationally) and at Royal Arsenal Riverside 
84% plan to remain in the neighbourhood 
(compared to 68% nationally). We are 
proud to have won ‘Property Company 
oftheYear–Residential’attheEstates
Gazette Awards 2013.

PARTNERSHIPS
We have a commitment to genuine 
partnership working. Partnership 
arrangements need to be tailored to suit 
each project, skillfully co-ordinating the 
investment and ambitions of Berkeley, 
the local authority, residents, Registered 
Social Landlords and other stakeholders. 
We listen to what local people and other 
partners want and incorporate this into 
the design wherever possible.

COMMUNITY ENGAGEMENT
Our Community Engagement Strategy 
wasupdatedin2014toreflectcurrent
best practice and is referred to for all new 
schemes. The type of engagement varies 
depending on the scheme and location. 
Many of our schemes adopt community 
planning strategies where local people are 
involved in the design, and at London Dock 
additional outreach events were held to 
engage parts of the community which were 
under-represented during the engagement 
programme, such as young people, older 
people and ethnic minorities. 

Other opportunities may arise for the 
communitytogetinvolvedinthefinal
scheme, such as a competition at the 
Phoenix School local to White City to 
design an area of proposed public space.

ECOLOGY AND CLIMATE CHANGE
We continue to seek advice from ecologists 
on each scheme, incorporate living roofs 
and build sites well-connected for public 
transport. Our approach to ecology was 
noted as part of our achievement of the 
Queen’s Award for Enterprise in Sustainable 
Development.In2014wecompleteda
piece of research on climate change 
adaptation measures to be incorporated  
in developments, and to be considered 
during our own operations. 77% of new 
developments between 2012 and 2014 
were designed to incorporate adaptation 
measures.Itisoneofourheadline
commitments for 2014 to 2016 to 
incorporate measures on all schemes. 

i  Learn more about Places at  
berkeleygroup.co.uk/our-vision

1  Cornerstone Café, Royal Arsenal Riverside 
2  Dial Arch Pub, Royal Arsenal Riverside 

HOW WE OPERATE: OUR VISION continued

PLACES

Create great places where people enjoy a good quality of life, now and in the future.

OUR APPR OACH

OU R HE A DLINE  COMMITMEN TS  F OR 2 01 4  –  2 016

We create well-designed, high quality, safe and 
sustainable places which will endure as settled,  
vibrant communities long into the future. These  
are places where people choose to live, work and  
spend their time, that directly encourage people’s 
wellbeing and quality of life, and offer them a space 
andabasefromwhichtoleadsafeandfulfilling
lives. Through our ability both to collaborate and to 
deliver, we aim to be the developer of choice for local 
authorities and existing communities. We believe  
that appreciating the needs of our customers and 
wider stakeholders before, during and after the 
delivery of our schemes and what makes them 
thrive as a community, is the right model for a truly 
successful and sustainable business in our sector. 

We have set three stretching commitments in the  
area of Places to continue to improve our approach:

–   Measure and increase people’s quality of life by 
applying a framework for social sustainability

–   Adapt all developments to climate change 

throughmeasuresonflooding,overheating 
and water shortage 

–   Test new forms of estate management and 

community governance

OUR  PROGRESS IN 2 01 2 – 201 4

COMMITMENT

PROGRESS

Work with experts to develop metrics to assess the social sustainability of our developments and  
pilot the metrics on at least one completed development

Conduct post-occupancy evaluation to assess the in-use success of community facilities  
(e.g. sports facilities, public realm, open space, children’s activities)

Work with residents, commercial occupiers, local businesses and the local community on at  
least one mixed-use development to promote local employment opportunities

Put in place adaptation measures on all developments to address future climate change risks



 





 Achieved   Partially achieved   Not achieved

SOCIAL SUSTA INABIL ITY

S 106

C YC LE  ST ORAGE

20 

assessments completed  
under our new social 
sustainability framework

£333m 

S106 contributions over  
thelastfiveyears

92% 

new sites designed to 
incorporate cycle storage

32

33

1

2

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  STRATEGIC REPORTBERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  STRATEGIC REPORT 
HOW WE OPERATE: OUR VISION continued

OPERATIONS

Make the right long-term decisions whilst running the business  
efficiently and working with our supply chain.

OUR APPR OACH

OU R HE A DLINE  COMMITMEN TS  F OR 2 01 4  –  2 016

Through recognition that the property market is 
inherently cyclical we make decisions with a focus  
on the long-term. We understand the operational 
risks in trying to successfully identify, design, build 
and sell homes and create new places. We aspire 
to maintain excellent partnerships with our supply 
chain to ensure that high quality services and 
materials are consistently provided and we are a 
client of choice. We support and engage with our 
supply chain and, through our supply chain, we 
help to provide employment and support to young 
people. We conduct our day-to-day operations 
inanenvironmentallyefficientmannerandwith
consideration to our neighbours. 

We have set ourselves three stretching 
commitments in the area of Operations to  
further improve our approach:

–   Achieve a 50% increase in site-based 

apprenticeships and training

–   Launch a £2 million fund for the supply chain  
to support innovation in health and safety

–   Map our supply chain risks and  

developasustainablespecification 
and procurement strategy

COMMITMENT

PROGRESS

OUR  PROGRESS IN 2 01 2 – 201 4

1

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
I
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

2

1  Royal Arsenal Riverside 
2  Roman House 

Integrateanassessmentofthesustainabilityofproducts,suppliersandcontractorsintothe 
formal selection process

Register all sites with the Considerate Constructors Scheme and achieve a minimum of  
35 points out of 50 in site audits (32 out of 40 prior to January 2013) 

Reduce average site carbon dioxide emissions by 3% per site operative by May 2014

Reduce average site water consumption by 3% per site operative by May 2014

Re-use or recycle over 85% of construction, demolition and excavation waste

 Achieved   Partially achieved   Not achieved





 



 

FEEDBACK

CONSIDERATE CONSTRUCTORS

ENER GY

100 

suppliers contacted to obtain 
feedback on our role as client

40.6/50 

average Considerate 
Constructors Scheme score

17% 

reduction in operational carbon 
emissions per site operative

SUPPLY CHAIN
Once schemes are in production, the 
support of a reliable and competent supply 
chain is critical to success. Engagement 
with our suppliers is key to remaining a 
client of choice and achieving high quality 
outcomes, on time and on budget. Supply 
chain conferences were held by several of 
our operating companies during 2014 and 
a supply chain task force was established. 
Risks in the supply chain have been 
assessed based on current and future 
market conditions and feedback requested 
from more than 100 of our suppliers; 75% 
said that working with the Group allowed 
their business to improve its own value. 

In2015weplantofurtherstrengthenour
relationships with the supply chain through 
a new supplier engagement programme. 
An innovation fund of up to £2 million will 
be made available to support our supply 
chain, and particularly small businesses, in 
targeting health and safety performance 
across the industry. 

APPRENTICESHIPS AND TRAINING
The Construction 2025 strategy set out 
a number of challenges for industry and 
Government, including invigorating the 
industry’s image, particularly to young 
people, and increasing capability in the 
workforce. Spot checks indicate that 
nearly 10% of our workforce of 11,000 
contractors on our sites is in formal 
training, including 2% currently working 
as an apprentice. Within St George, 
training has been boosted through the 
employment of workplace co-ordinators; 
74 apprentices have been working across 
11 sites during the year. Alongside our 
efforts with apprentices and training, we 
also aim to encourage young people into 
the industry through a series of talks and 
events with schools and colleges. 

CONSIDERATE CONSTRUCTION
All of our construction sites are registered 
under the voluntary Considerate Constructors 
Scheme (CCS) and its Code of Practice. 
Our average audit score of 40.6/50 is far  
in excess of the industry average of 35.5. 

We were delighted that one third of our 
schemes were recognised at the 2014 
National Site Awards, including two  
which achieved Most Considerate Site 
Runner-Upstatuswhichrankstheminthe
top 27 construction sites in the country. 

ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT
Site carbon emissions per person have 
reduced by 17%, with total emissions of 
16,908 tonnes CO2e from site activities 
in 2014. During the same period our 
water consumption has increased by 
3%;principallythiswasduetosignificant
demolition operations requiring dust 
suppression and landscaping works.  
Our waste recycling rate has increased  
to 94% (2013: 93%). Further information  
on carbon emissions is set out within  
the Directors’ report on page 82.

i  Learn more about Operations at  
berkeleygroup.co.uk/our-vision

34

35

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  STRATEGIC REPORTBERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  STRATEGIC REPORT 
HOW WE OPERATE: OUR VISION continued

OUR PEOPLE

Develop a highly skilled workforce who run autonomous businesses, operate in a safe  
and supportive working environment, and contribute to wider society.

OUR APPR OACH

OU R HE A DLINE  COMMITMEN TS  F OR 2 01 4  -  201 6

A devolved business structure is at the heart of our 
strategy. Our recognised brands and autonomous 
operational teams carefully manage each individual 
scheme to ensure that the entrepreneurial spirit of 
the business continues. Recruiting and retaining a 
high calibre workforce is crucial to our approach. We 
must support both our direct employees and the 
wider workforce of the contractors working on our 
sites. We are proud to be safe; safety continues to 
be a key focus area across all of our operations, in 
addition to enhancing health and wellbeing. We  
also aim to have a positive impact on society and 
enable young people to get into work through  
our support of the Berkeley Foundation.

We have set ourselves four stretching commitments 
in the area of Our People to continue to improve  
our approach:

–  Pay at least the living wage to all direct employees

–     Reduce energy costs by up to £500,000,  

investing 50% of the saving in new health  
and wellbeing initiatives

–     Encourage and support every member of staff to 
be involved with the Berkeley Foundation each year

–     Launch a talent management programme which 
develops new ideas to enhance the business

OUR  PROGRESS IN 2 01 2 – 201 4

COMMITMENT

PROGRESS

Measure staff retention rates and workforce diversity and benchmark performance

Ensure that a minimum of 5% of our own staff and those working on our construction sites are 
employed in an apprenticeship or training role

ContinuetoachieveaRIDDORreportableAccidentIncidentRate(AIR)oflessthan 
3.5 incidents per 1,000 employees and subcontractors

Further enhance the Group’s ‘Good Work’ health and safety programme through active 
engagement with contractors’ operatives on all our projects

Raise £250,000 annually for the Berkeley Foundation through employee fundraising and donations

 Achieved   Partially achieved   Not achieved

 

 

 

 

 

APPRENTICES

H EALT H  AN D  S AFET Y

T HE  B ERK EL EY  F OUND ATI ON

115 

apprentices worked on  
our sites in 2014

2.92 

per 1,000 employees  
and operatives (2013: 2.99)  
AccidentIncidentRate

£5m 

funds committed to  
good causes through the 
Berkeley Foundation

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
I
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

LOYALTY AND DIVERSITY
Our business continues to grow; we 
now have over 1,850 direct employees 
who are central to our success. We are 
mindful of the need to attract, retain and 
promote a talented and diverse group of 
professionalsateverylevel.Inarecent
staff survey undertaken by St James, 90% 
of employees were proud to work for 
St James. The business also retained its 
InvestorsinPeopleaccreditation.Across
the Group, nearly 40% of employees 
are female as are over 20% of our Main 
Board directors. Coming second across 
all industries for ‘Britain’s Most Admired 
Company’ was testament to our ability 
to attract talent, as well as our business 
performance and social responsibility. 

TRAINING
Training is provided to all employees 
based on job roles. We also operate formal 
training schemes for graduates, as well as 
a sales academy and production academy. 
Skills for effective communication, working 
together and empowering others formed 
akeypartoftheInstituteofCustomer
Service training already undertaken across 
some of the Group and planned for further 
rollout in 2015. 

Inlinewiththistheme,a‘Working
Together’ conference in early May 2014 
brought together 250 people from across 
the business to share information. 

EMPLOYMENT
Inadditiontoourdirectemployees,we
also support a large workforce through 
our contractors; in April 2014 around 
11,000 people were working on our sites. 
InfactBerkeleyisdirectlyorindirectly
supportingaround21,000jobsintheUK.

HEALTH AND SAFETY
OurAccidentIncidentRate(AIR)remains
better than the industry average at 2.92 
(2013: 2.99). There has been an increased 
focus on high risk activities across the 
Group in the past 18 months in response 
to the dramatic increase in production, 
growth in workforce and higher proportion 
of more complex developments under 
construction. We have doubled our team 
of dedicated health and safety staff as 
well as introducing new Group Health 
and Safety Standards and revised safety 
management systems. 

THE BERKELEY FOUNDATION
The Berkeley Foundation is now a 
registered charity which has committed 
or invested almost £5 million to the lives 
of young people and their families over 
the past three years. Two thirds of our 
employees were involved during the year 
2013, whether by fundraising, volunteering 
or payroll giving and we are aiming to 
increase this to 100% over the next two 
years. The Job Creation Programme 
launched in 2013 has so far enabled more 
than 60 unemployed people to get into 
work.Anewfive-yearstrategicplanhas
been published to take the Foundation 
to 2019. For more information see 
berkeleyfoundation.org.uk. 

i  Learn more about Our People at  
berkeleygroup.co.uk/our-vision

EMPLOYEE DIVERSITY

FEMALE MALE

TOTAL

697

1,171

1,868

1

3

5

6

11

14

Total  
Employees

Senior  
Management

Board of  
Directors

At 30 April 2014. 
*ThefiguresfortheBoardofDirectorsisbasedonthe
Board on the date of signing these accounts, including 
one director appointed on 1 May 2014.

36

37

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  STRATEGIC REPORTBERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  STRATEGIC REPORT 
S
T
R
A
T
E
G
I
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

NEW  LA ND

Berkeley committed 

£353 million 

to acquire new land  
in 2014

TRADING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND OUTLOOK

“We have a clear plan to ensure that shareholders benefit from this  
success by returning £13 per share (over £1.7 billion) by 2021 and  
retaining a successful, sustainable business thereafter.”

OVERVIEW
Berkeley has built and sold 3,742 new 
homes this year at an average selling  
price of £423,000, driving a 40.4% increase 
inpre-taxprofitsto£380.0millionand 
a rise in return on shareholders’ equity 
from 22.4% to 27.5%.

Basic earnings per share have grown 
by 38.6% to 221.8 pence, of which 149 
pence has been paid to shareholders as 
dividends in the year, and the estimated 
value of gross margin in the Group’s land 
holdings is now in excess of £3 billion.

The Group remained ungeared 
throughout the year, with net cash rising 
from £44.7 million to £129.2 million after 
paying £195.2 million of dividends to 
shareholders and investing further in  
new land and construction.

HOUSING MARKET
Domestic demand in the housing market 
in London and the South of England has 
been strong throughout the year, above 
allforplacesbenefitingfromqualityof
design, public realm, transport links and 
access to jobs and amenities. The market 
hasbenefitedfromastablesocialand
political environment, low interest rates, 
and a return to growth in the economy.

London’s standing as a global city 
continues to drive demand and attract 
investmentfromwithintheUKand
overseas. London’s success is crucial 
to economic growth and a plentiful 
supply of good quality new homes and 
places is essential to supporting this. 
Berkeley understands the importance of 
enabling those people who live and work 
heretofindahome,andmaintainsits
commitment to offer all of its schemes  
totheUKmarketfirst.

Berkeley’s experience is that prices for its 
properties have increased in line with those 
reported in the market more generally. 

Whilst the Government’s Help to Buy 
scheme has been helpful in bringing 
home ownership to within the reach of 
many more people, it has had limited 
benefittoBerkeleyasawholeduetothe
proportion of its sales which are off-plan. 
On the 17 schemes where qualifying 
properties were available, it has supported 
some 36% of sales in the year, a total of 
159 sales over the last twelve months.

Cancellation rates in the year were 
approximately 8%. These remain low 
compared to normal historical ranges and 
reflectthestrongermarketbothinside
andoutsideLondon.Thisisalsoreflected
in historically low completed stock levels 
at 30 April 2014, at which date Berkeley 
held 39 such properties in inventories 
compared to 140 at 30 April 2013.

  YEAR ENDED 30 APRIL  

£’MILLION 

£’MILLION 

£’MILLION 

%

2014  

2013 

        CHANGE 

CHANGE

  Revenue  

1,620.6 

1,372.6 

 Operatingprofit
 Netfinancecosts
  Share of joint ventures result 

 Profitbeforetax
  Taxation 

 Profitaftertax

  EPS Basic 
  ROE 

374.8
(6.9)
12.1 

380.0
(87.1) 

292.9

221.8p 
27.5% 

280.1
(8.1)
(1.3) 

270.7
(61.0) 

209.7

160.0p 
22.4% 

  Homes sold 
  Average selling price 

3,742 
£423,000 

3,712
£354,000

+248.0 

+94.7
+1.2
+13.4

+109.3
-26.1

+83.2

+61.8p 
+5.1%

+18.1%

+33.8%

+40.4%

+39.7%

+38.6%

PIPELINE OF FUTURE LAND
Inadditiontoitslandholdings,the
Group’s pipeline of future land now 
comprises over 11,000 plots with a 
potential gross margin of some £1.5 
billion. These are schemes which cannot 
be delivered at the current time as 
they do not have an implementable 
planning consent and are dependent on 
resolving practical technical constraints 
and challenges surrounding vacant 
possession. Accordingly, these sites 
have been differentiated from Berkeley’s 
landholdingsastheyrequiresignificant
further investment in land, planning 
and infrastructure. The Group is aiming 
tounlockthesesitesoverthenextfive
years to support the business beyond the 
conclusion of the current plan. Nine new 
sites have been added to the pipeline 
in the year, including six in London at 
Southall,Kingston,Westminster,Hornsey,
Battersea and Orpington and three 
outside London in Bracknell, Ockham  
and Sevenoaks.

The pipeline provides a transparent 
source of land for future development 
beyond 2021 which is not dependent  
on buying land in the open market. 

LAND HOLDINGS
Berkeley has unconditionally acquired nine 
new sites in the year, investing a further 
£353 million in land to secure some 2,500 
plots into its land holdings. These include 
six London schemes, comprising a 10 acre 
redevelopment site in White City, a site in 
Battersea with a detailed planning consent 
for 456 apartments, two sites on the 
Albert Embankment and two sites in West 
London. Three sites have been secured 
outside London in Bath, Barns Green in 
West Sussex and Taplow in Berkshire.

The Group has continued to add value 
to its land holdings during the year. 
Berkeley has secured a number of new 
planning consents in the year, including 
a former convent in Mill Hill, housing 
schemes in Finchley and Maidenhead, 
mixed-use schemes in Hammersmith and 
Twickenham, and a student development 
inBath.Inaddition,some10%ofvalue
has been added to the Group’s land 
holdings through optimisation of the 
future phases of existing schemes and 
updates to price and cost valuations. At  
30 April 2014, 65 of Berkeley’s 77 sites 
have an implementable planning consent, 
all of which are in construction, whilst the 
remainder are in the planning process.

The Group’s land holdings now include 
24,006 plots (30 April 2013: 25,684) with an 
estimated future gross margin of £3,014 
million (30 April 2013: £2,852 million) and 
an average selling price of £419,000  
(30April2013:£378,000).Thisreflects 
the increased London weighting of 
Berkeley’s schemes.

APRIL 2014 

CHANGE 

APRIL 2013

Owned 

Contracted 

Plots 

Sales value 

Average selling price 

Average plot cost 

Land cost 

Gross margin 

Gross margin (%) 

23,486 

520 

24,006 

£10,062m 

£419k 

£72k 

17.3% 

£3,014m 

30.0% 

-1,569 

-109 

-1,678 

+£355m 

+£41k 

+£10k 

+0.7% 

+£162m 

+0.6% 

25,055

629

25,684

£9,707m

£378k

£62k

16.5%

£2,852m

29.4%

38

39

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  STRATEGIC REPORTBERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  STRATEGIC REPORT 
 
   
TRADING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND OUTLOOK continued

Trade and other payables are £1,367.2 
million at 30 April 2014 (£1,021.4 million 
at 30 April 2013). These include £741.6 
million of on account receipts from 
customers (30 April 2013: £426.1 million) 
and land creditors of £210.0 million (30 
April 2013: £180.9 million). The increase  
in land creditors relates to the purchase of 
a site in White City in the year on deferred 
terms before payments made against 
existing land creditors at Wapping. 
Provisions of £57.1 million (30 April 2013: 
£29.0 million) include £53.3 million in 
respect of post completion development 
obligations (30 April 2013: £23.6 million) 
and £3.8 million of other provisions  
arising in the ordinary course of business  
(30 April 2013: £5.4 million).

During the year, £337.6 million of cash  
was generated from operations  
(2013: £291.8 million). This is before  
a net investment in working capital of  
£77.9 million (2013: £102.8 million), 
where the increase in the investment in 
construction has been matched by the 
increase in customer deposits, proceeds 
from the disposal of rental fund properties 
of £138.2 million (2013: £12.6 million), 
taxandothercashoutflowsof£118.2
million (2013: £79.3 million) and dividends 
of £195.2 million (2013: £19.7 million). A 
net increase in net cash of £84.5 million, 
together with a £34.4 million increase in 
capital employed in the balance sheet, 
has resulted in a £118.9 million rise in net 
assets from £1,322.4 million at 30 April 
2013 to £1,441.3 million at 30 April 2014.

TRADING ANALYSIS
Revenue of £1,620.6 million this year 
(2013: £1,372.6 million) mainly comprised 
£1,605.0 million of residential revenue 
from the sale of new homes in London 
and the South of England (2013: £1,337.9 
million). The remainder was commercial 
revenue of £15.6 million (2013: £26.4 
million). There were no land sales in the 
year (2013: £8.3 million).

The residential revenue resulted from the 
sale of 3,742 new homes (2013: 3,712) 
on Berkeley’s private, affordable and 
student schemes at an average selling 
price of £423,000 (2013: £354,000). This 
includes the disposal of 534 properties 
from Berkeley’s rental fund to M&G 
Investments.Theincreaseinaverage
selling price is consistent with successful 
delivery of sites acquired in London since 
2009, with the mix of schemes now in 
construction weighted towards a lower 
volume of higher value properties.

Revenue of £15.6 million from commercial 
activities (2013: £26.4 million) included the 
sale of retail space across a number of the 
Group’s developments including Marine 
Wharf in Deptford, Goodman’s Fields in 
Aldgate, Fulham Reach in Hammersmith 
andImperialWharfinFulham.

PROFIT BEFORE TAX
Operating margin has increased from 
20.4%to23.1%.Thisreflectsthebenefit
of operational gearing and the change of 
mix of residential properties sold, which 
includes completions at the St George 
Wharf Tower in the second half of the 
year, offset by an increase in overheads 
by £10.8 million to £134.1 million (2013: 
£123.3 million) which have reduced as a 
percentage of revenue from 9.0% to 8.3%.

The Group’s share of the results of joint 
ventureswasaprofitof£12.1million
(2013:lossof£1.3million)whichreflects
completions at both Stanmore Place and 
375KensingtonHighStreetintheyear.

Netfinancecostshavedecreasedby 
£1.2 million from £8.1 million to £6.9 million. 
The Group started and ended the year in a 
net cash position, and so generated some 
income from its cash holdings. This was  
more than offset by the amortisation of facility 
feesandotherfinanceincomeandcosts
including imputed interest on land creditors.

Pre-tax return on equity has increased  
from 22.4% to 27.5% and measures 
underlying performance from the 
operational business.

Profitbeforetaxhasincreasedby£109.3
million from £270.7 million to £380.0 
million. Basic earnings per share, which 
reflectstheprevailingUKcorporationtax
rate and the issue of 4.3 million shares 
in January to satisfy share awards, has 
increased by 38.6% from 160.0 pence to 
221.8 pence.

Profitbeforetax:2013

Increaseingrossmargin

Increaseinoverheads

Decreaseinnetfinancecosts

£’MILLION

270.7

+105.5

-10.8

+1.2

Increaseinresultfromjointventures +13.4

Profitbeforetax:2014

380.0

FINANCIAL POSITION
Inventorieshaveincreasedfrom£2,066.7
million at 30 April 2013 to £2,481.2 million 
at 30 April 2014 which demonstrates 
the continued steady investment in the 
business.Inventoriesinclude£492.4
million of land not under development  
(30 April 2013: £310.0 million), £1,966.4 
million of work in progress (30 April 2013: 
£1,711.7 million) and £22.4 million of 
completed stock (30 April 2013:  
£45.0 million).

Within work in progress, Berkeley’s 
investment in construction has risen by 
£329.3 million to £1,180.3 million at 30 
April 2014, supported by a 57% increase 
in cash due on forward sales. By taking 
the opportunity to forward sell, Berkeley 
has secured certainty over its sales 
pricestogiveittheconfidencetogrow
its construction activities, but is mindful 
thatbuildcostinflationisarisktofuture
margins.Upwardpressureonbuild
costs and the more restricted availability 
of materials and skilled labour within 
the supply chain have been prevalent, 
although in the current market the impact  
of this has been broadly mitigated by 
house price increases.

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
I
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

  ANALYSIS OF CAPITAL EMPLOYED 

APRIL 2014 

£’MILLION 

CHANGE 

APRIL 2013

£’MILLION 

£’MILLION

 Investmentproperties

  Assets held for resale 

  Other non-current assets 

 Inventories

  Trade and other receivables 

  Trade and other payables 

       - Deposits and on account receipts 

       - Other trade payables 

  Current tax liabilities 

  Provisions 

  Capital employed 

  ANALYSIS OF INVENTORIES 

  Land not under development  

  Work in progress: land cost 

  Work in progress: build cost 

  Completed units 

  CASH FLOW 

 Profitbeforetax

 Increaseininventories

  Other working capital movements 

  Tax paid 

  Other movements 

 Cashinflowbeforedividends

  Dividends 

 Increaseinnetcash

  Opening net cash/(debt) 

  Closing net cash 













7.2

- 

172.7 

2,481.2

159.0 

(741.6) 

(625.6) 

(83.7) 

(57.1) 

1,312.1 

-19.3

-75.8 

+38.4 

+414.5

+32.2 

-315.5 

-30.3 

+18.3 

-28.1 

+34.4 

26.5

75.8

134.3

2,066.7

126.8

(426.1)

(595.3)

(102.0)

(29.0)

1,277.7

APRIL 2014 

£’MILLION 

CHANGE 

APRIL 2013

£’MILLION 

£’MILLION

492.4 

786.1 

1,278.5 

1,180.3 

22.4 

2,481.2 

+182.4 

-74.6 

+107.8 

+329.3 

-22.6 

+414.5 

310.0

860.7

1,170.7

851.0

45.0

2,066.7









2014 
£’MILLION 

2013
£’MILLION

380.0

(414.5)

336.6 

(92.4) 

70.0 

279.7

(195.2) 

84.5

44.7 

129.2 

270.7

(215.0)

112.2

(69.2)

23.6

122.3

(19.7)

102.6

(57.9)

44.7

40

41

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  STRATEGIC REPORTBERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  STRATEGIC REPORT 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
    
 
 
 
    
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
TRADING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND OUTLOOK continued

RETURNS TO  
SHAREHOLDERS  
£’MILLION  

PENCE
PER
SHARE

Paid in year  
ended April 2013 

Paid in year  
ended April 2014 

Interimdividenddeclared 
for payment in 
September 2014  

Balance to be paid by  
30 September 2015  
(firstmilestone)*

By 30 September 2018  
(second milestone)* 

By 30 September 2021  
(third milestone)* 

19.7  

15

195.2  

149

121.8  

90

243.6

585.8  

585.8  

180

433

433

1,751.9  

1,300

* Based on 135.3 million shares currently in issue

OUTLOOK
These results demonstrate that Berkeley is 
well placed and, although earnings remain 
sensitive to the timing of delivery of some of 
its larger developments, the Board currently 
expects underlying full year earnings in 
2015 to be in line with current market 
expectationsbeforetheone-offbenefit
of the sale of the ground rent assets. The 
Group remains alert to the uncertainty which 
will arise from changes to the economic 
and political landscape in the run-up to a 
2015 General Election and may impact the 
business and the market more generally. 

Berkeley understands the industry and 
the inherently cyclical market in which 
it operates, and has the right strategy, 
people and framework to deliver long-term 
sustainable success. The Group is on course 
to meet its commitment to return over £1.7 
billion to shareholders by 2021 and, with 
the visibility provided by the land pipeline, 
provide a sustainable business thereafter.

BANKING FACILITIES
At 30 April 2014, and throughout the 
financialyear,theGroupwasungeared.
Committed corporate banking facilities 
remain at £525 million. Of this, £250 
million matures in April 2018 and £275 
million in May 2018, providing good 
visibility and headroom within the  
Group’s business plan.

JOINT VENTURES
Investmentsaccountedforusingthe
equity method have increased from £44.1 
million at 30 April 2013 to £61.4 million 
at 30 April 2014. This relates almost 
exclusively to Berkeley’s investment in  
St Edward, a joint venture with Prudential.

St Edward has three schemes currently 
in development at Stanmore Place, 375 
KensingtonHighStreetand190Strand.
203 homes were sold in the year at an 
average selling price of £1,235,000 (2013: 
66at£277,000),anincreasewhichreflects
the change of mix in properties sold.

1,389 plots in Berkeley’s land holdings 
relate to St Edward schemes (30 April 
2013: 1,592), and St Edward is continuing 
to identify opportunities to develop the 
joint venture through further sites to 
which it can add value. This includes a 
commercial site in Westminster which is 
conditional on vacant possession and so 
is included in the land pipeline. The joint 
venture is partly funded by a £60 million 
bank facility which was undrawn at year 
end (30 April 2013: £34 million drawn).

TAXATION
The Group’s policy is to pay the amount 
of tax legally due and to observe all 
applicable rules and regulations. At 
the same time we have an obligation 
to maximise shareholder value and to 
managefinancialandreputationalrisk.
This includes minimising and controlling 
our tax costs, as we look to do for all costs 
of our business. Factors that may affect 
the Group’s tax charge include changes in 
legislation, the impact of corporate activity 
(restructuring, acquisitions, disposals, etc), 
the resolution of open tax issues from 
prior years and planning opportunities. 
The Group makes provision for potential 
tax liabilities that may arise, however the 
amount ultimately paid may differ from 
the amount accrued.

RENTAL FUND
Berkeley’s private rental fund held 729 
properties at a historic cost of £102.3 
million at 30 April 2013. 534 of the 
properties were held at £75.8 million as 
‘Non-currentassetsclassifiedasheldfor
resale’, and the remaining 195 properties 
wereheldin‘Investmentproperties’at
£26.5 million.

The sale of the 534 properties held for 
resaletoM&GInvestmentscompleted
on 5 June 2013 for an aggregate price of 
£105.4 million included in revenue. After 
repayment of £17.4 million of funding from 
the Homes and Communities Agency, and 
re-investment of £10 million for a minority 
stakeintheM&GInvestmentFund,thenet
proceeds of sale were £75.2 million and 
aprofitof£29.6millionwasrecognised
withinoperatingprofitintheyear.

54 properties from Berkeley’s rental fund 
remainheldinInvestmentproperties 
at £7.2 million at 30 April 2014 (195 at  
£26.5 million at 30 April 2013). This follows 
the disposal in the year of 141 properties 
for£32.8millionofrevenueandaprofit
of £13.6 million where market conditions 
have supported their sale.

GROUND RENTS
On 30 May 2014, the Group exchanged 
contracts for the sale of a portfolio of 
ground rent assets for £99.8 million. The sale 
is expected to give rise to a non-recurring 
profitondisposalofapproximately£80
millionaftertransactioncostsinthefirst 
half of the year ending 30 April 2015.

LONG-TERM STRATEGIC PLAN
Berkeley has a long-term strategic plan to 
return £13 per share to shareholders by 30 
September 2021, broken down into three 
milestones of 434 pence by September 
2015, 433 pence by September 2018 and 
433 pence by September 2021.

The Board has considered the results 
of the Group and determined that it is 
appropriate to propose a further interim 
dividend of 90 pence per share, payable 
on 26 September 2014 to shareholders on 
the register on 22 August 2014. With this, 
the Group has now paid or committed to 
pay a total of 254 pence per share under 
its long-term plan to return 1,300 pence 
per share to shareholders by 2021, and it 
leaves 180 pence per share to return to 
meetthefirstmilestoneof434penceper
share by September 2015.

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
I
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

AWARDS
The Berkeley Group is proud to have  
been awarded the Queen’s Award for 
Enterprise for Sustainable Development 
thisyearforthesecondtime,thefirst
housebuilder to achieve this.

For the third time, we have been recognised 
by Management Today as one of Britain’s 
Most Admired Companies, recognised 
as the leading housebuilder and ranked 
second alongside some of the country’s 
most successful and respected businesses.

For the eighth year running we were  
ranked as the top homebuilder in the  
2013 NextGeneration benchmarking 
initiative. The benchmark ranks the  
UK’s25largesthomebuildersaccording 
to their sustainability, strategy  
and performance.

ROB PERRINS
MANAGING DIRECTOR
11 JULY 2014

QUEEN’S AWARD FOR SUSTAINABLE 
DEVELOPMENT 2014

NEXT GENERATION  
BENCHMARK 2013

BRITAIN’S MOST ADMIRED  
COMPANY 2013

First housebuilder to win the 
award for the second time

Ranked as the most  
sustainable homebuilder for  
the 8th successive year

Ranked second across  
businesses from all sectors

These are strong results which 
reflect the current market 
conditions and Berkeley’s bold 
strategy to invest at the right 
point in the economic and 
housing cycle

42

43

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  STRATEGIC REPORTBERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  STRATEGIC REPORT 
 
 
 
 
 
BERKELEYANNUALREPORT2014/STRATEGICREPORT

BERKELEYANNUALREPORT2014/STRATEGICREPORT

CASE STUDY – THE ‘BERKELEY DIFFERENCE’ AT:

ROYAL ARSENAL RIVERSIDE

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
I
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

“Our vision for Royal Arsenal 
Riverside is to transform a derelict 
industrial munitions site into a 
beautiful, Thame-side destination 
withaflourishingcommunityand
first-classtransportlinks.”

LO CATI ON

NUMBER  OF  HO ME S

D EVELOPMENT  T YPES

LENGTH OF SCHEME

4,961

New homes, luxury apartments, 
retail and leisure facilities and 
transport links

20 years 

PLACEMAKING

WATERFRONT

TRANS PORT LINKS

Already home to over 4,500 residents, 
Berkeley focused on the early delivery of 
whatwasrequiredtoserveaflourishing
riverside community. Residents currently 
benefitfromaTescoExpress,Doctors,
Dentist and nursery as well as a health  
and well-being centre and the Dial Arch 
gastro pub.

With a concierge, residents gym and a 
swimming pool, the Waterfront will offer 
London city living in Woolwich. Berkeley 
will be implementing the highest level of 
specificationbefittingofacentralLondon
luxury development, setting itself apart 
from all competition in the area. 

Berkeley invested and built the Crossrail 
station box to ensure that Royal Arsenal 
Riverside is one of the best connected sites 
in London. With the arrival of Crossrail in 
2019, central London and the West End  
will be only minutes away.

44

45
45

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  STRATEGIC REPORT 
BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  GOVERNANCE

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  GOVERNANCE

GOVERNANCE

G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

AN EXPERIENCED AND ACTIVE BOARD  
COMMITTED TO MAINTAINING A HIGH 
STANDARD OF CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

CHELSEA CREEK (COMPUTER GENERATED IMAGE)

46

47

BERKELEYANNUALREPORT2014/GOVERNANCE

BERKELEYANNUALREPORT2014/GOVERNANCE

BOARD OF DIRECTORS

CHAIRMAN AND EXECUTIVE DIRECTORS

TONY PIDGLEY CBE   N
Co-founder of the Company  
in 1976 with Jim Farrer. He was 
appointed Group Chairman  
on 9 September 2009, having 
previously been the Group 
Managing Director since the 
formation of the Group in 
1976. He is Chairman of the 
Nomination Committee.

ROB PERRINS BSC (Hons) FCA
Joined the Company in 1994 
havingqualifiedasachartered
accountantwithErnst&Young
in 1991. He was appointed  
to the Group Main Board on  
1 May 2001 on becoming 
Managing Director of Berkeley 
Homes plc. He became Group 
Finance Director on 2 November 
2001, moving to his current role 
as Group Managing Director on 
9 September 2009.

NON-E XECUTIVE DIR EC T ORS

NICK SIMPKIN ACA
Joined Berkeley in 2002 and 
has held a number of senior 
financepositionsincluding
Finance Director of St James 
and Head of Finance for 
Berkeley Group. He joined  
the Board and became  
Group Finance Director on  
10 September 2009.

KARL WHITEMAN
Joined Berkeley in 1996  
as a Construction Director  
and currently leads the 
Berkeley Homes East Thames 
division. He joined the Board 
on 10 September 2009 as a 
Divisional Executive Director.

SEAN ELLIS BSC (Hons)
Joined Berkeley in 2004  
with an expertise in land  
and is currently Chairman  
of St James Group and the 
Berkeley Homes Eastern 
Counties Division. He joined  
the Group Main Board on  
9 September 2010 as a  
Divisional Executive Director.

GREG FRY FCA
Joined the Group in 1982  
and is currently Chairman  
of St George, having been  
a Director since its inception  
in 1986. He was reappointed  
to the Group Main Board  
on 5 September 2011 as a 
Divisional Executive Director, 
having previously been a 
member of the Group Main 
Board from 1 May 1996 to  
22 July 2010.

COMPANY SECRETA RY
E A Driver

HONORARY LIFE PRESIDENT
JimFarrerMRICS,alongwithTonyPidgley
a co-founder of Berkeley, he was Group 
Chairman until his retirement in 1992.  
At that time he was appointed Honorary 
Life President.

KEY

N   Nomination Committee
A   Audit Committee
R   Remuneration Committee

G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

SIR JOHN ARMITT    N   R
Appointed a Non-executive 
Director on 1 October 2007  
and became Deputy Chairman 
on 5 September 2012. He is 
currently Chairman of the 
Olympic Delivery Authority, 
Chairman of National Express 
Group PLC, Chairman of City 
and Guilds and is a member of 
the Transport for London Board. 
He was Chairman of the 
Engineering and Physical 
Science Research Council until 
31 March 2012. From 2001 to 
2007, he was Chief Executive of 
Network Rail and its predecessor, 
Railtrack. Sir John is the Senior 
IndependentDirector.

DAVID HOWELL FCA    N   A
Appointed a Non-executive 
Director on 25 February 2004. 
David is currently a Non-executive 
Director of two private companies 
and Copthorne Holdings Ltd, the 
parent company of Countryside 
Properties plc as well as being 
Treasurer and a Trustee of British 
Red Cross. He was previously  
a Main Board Director of 
lastminute.com plc, Group 
Finance Director of First Choice 
Holidays plc, Executive Chairman 
of Western and Oriental plc, 
Chairman of EBTM plc 
(Everything but the Music) and a 
Non-executive Director of Nestor 
Healthcare Group plc. He chairs 
the Audit Committee. David will 
stand down from the Board at 
the AGM on 1 September 2014.

ADRIAN LI
Appointed a Non-executive 
Director on 2 September 2013. 
He is currently Deputy Chief 
Executive of The Bank of  
East Asia, Ltd., with responsibility 
forthebank’sHongKong
business.HeisanIndependent
Non-executive Director of Sino 
Land Company Ltd., Tsim Sha 
Tsui Properties Ltd., Sino Hotels 
(Holdings) Ltd., China State 
ConstructionInternational
HoldingsLtd.,COSCOPacific
Ltd. and Shanghai Fosun 
Pharmaceutical (Group) Co. Ltd.  
He is a member of the 
InternationalAdvisoryBoard 
ofAbertisInfraestructuras,S.A,
and is an Alternate Director of 
SanMiguelBreweryHongKong
LtdandAFFINHoldingsBerhad.

ALISON NIMMO CBE    A
Appointed a Non-executive 
Director on 5 September 2011, 
Alison is Chief Executive of The 
Crown Estate. Prior to that she 
led the design and delivery of  
the London 2012 Olympic and 
Paralympic venues as Director 
of Regeneration and Design at 
the Olympic Delivery Authority.

VERONICA WADLEY    N   A
Appointed a Non-executive 
Director on 3 January 2012.  
She is currently Chair of the  
Arts Council London, a Senior 
Adviser to the Mayor of London 
and a National Council member 
of Arts Council England. 
Previously Editor of The Evening 
Standard, she is also an 
IndependentDirectorofTimes
Newspapers Holdings Ltd.

GLYN BARKER BSC (Hons) FCA  
A   R
Appointed a Non-executive 
Director on 3 January 2012 
following a 35 year career 
with PwC, most recently as 
itsUKViceChairman.He
previously held a number 
of senior posts within PwC 
including Managing Partner 
and Head of Assurance and 
also established and ran their 
Transactions Services business. 
Glyn is a Non-executive 
Director of Aviva plc and 
Transocean Limited, Chairman 
ofthelawfirmIrwinMitchell
and a Director of the English 
National Opera Company. 
He is Chairman of the 
Remuneration Committee. 

ANDY MYERS BEng ACA    A   R
Appointed a Non-executive 
Director on 6 December 2013, 
he is currently Chief Financial 
OfficeratMcLarenGroup
Limited, having previously  
heldseniorfinancerolesin 
Rolls Royce plc and BMW/
Rover Group. 

DIANA BRIGHTMORE- 
ARMOUR FCCA, MCT
Appointed as a Non-executive 
Director on 1 May 2014, Diana 
iscurrentlytheUKCEOofThe
Australia and New Zealand 
Banking Group Ltd and 
previously held the position 
of CEO, Corporate Banking 
at Lloyds Banking Group 
(2004-2012). Diana has 30 years 
of international experience in 
banking,corporatefinance,
financialmanagement,treasury
and audit.

48

49

 
 CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REPORT

The Company is committed to maintaining 
a high standard of corporate governance 
in respect of leadership, effectiveness, 
accountability, remuneration and 
relationships with our shareholders as 
identified by the UK Corporate Governance 
Code 2012 (the Code). In the year to  
30 April 2014, the revised principles and 
provisions of the Code (published In 
September 2012 by the Financial Reporting 
Council (FRC) applied to the Company. 

This section, including the Audit Committee 
Report and the Remuneration Report detail 
how the Company has applied the principles 
and provisions of the Code. The Company’s 
business model is explained in the Strategic 
Report. It is the Board’s view that it has been 
fully compliant with the Code throughout  
the 2013/14 financial year other than 
in respect of the composition of the 
Remuneration Committee on which there 
were two rather than three independent 
Non-executive Directors between  
2 September 2013 and 30 April 2014.  
The Group has been fully compliant since  
1 May 2014 when Andy Myers was appointed 
to the committee. A copy of the Code is 
available on the Financial Reporting Council’s 
website www.frc.org.uk

THE BOARD
ROLE
The Board has a collective responsibility 
for promoting the long term success of the 
Company in a safe and sustainable manner in 
order to create shareholder value. The Board 
provides leadership and sets the Company’s 
strategic long-term objectives. 

Its duties are set out in a formal schedule of 
matters specifically reserved for decision by 
the Board, which include:

–   Overall management of the Group, its 
strategy and long-term objectives;

–  Approval of corporate plans;

–  Approval of all corporate transactions;

–  Changes to the Group’s capital structure;

–  Approval of the Group’s treasury policy;

–   Approval of the Group’s interim and 
annual results, dividend policy and 
shareholder distributions;

–   Reviewing the Group’s risks and system of 

internal control;

–   Changes to the Board and other senior 

executive roles;

–   Corporate Governance arrangements and 

the Board evaluation; and

–   Approval of policies in key areas including 

Sustainability, Health & Safety and 
Business Ethics.

COMPOSITION, DIVERSITY AND
INDEPENDENCE
At the date of this report the Board 
comprises fourteen Directors; the Chairman, 
five Executive Directors and eight 
independent Non-executive Directors.  
The biographies of these directors are set 
out on page 48.

During the year, Alan Coppin stepped down 
from the Board and Adrian Li was appointed 
as an Independent Non-executive Director  
at the Annual General Meeting on  
2 September 2013. On 6 December 2013, 
Andy Myers was also appointed as an 
Independent Non-executive Director.  
On 1 May 2014, Diana Brightmore-Armour 
was appointed as an Independent Non-
executive Director.

The Board has evolved over recent years to 
put in place the succession planning that 
all successful organisations require and the 
composition of the Board continues to be 
reviewed on a regular basis to ensure that an 
appropriate balance of skills is maintained. 
The Board has chosen not to set specific 
representation targets for women at Board 
level at this time. However, it recognises 
that the benefits of diversity, including 
gender diversity, will continue to be an active 
consideration when further changes to the 
Board’s composition are considered.

The Board considers that all of the current 
Non-executive Directors were independent 
throughout the year. David Howell joined  
the Board in February 2004 and has now 
served more than nine years on the Board.  
At the Annual General Meeting on  
1 September 2014, David Howell will step 
down from the Board. The Non-executive 
Directors, led by the Senior Independent 
Director Sir John Armitt, have the skills, 
experience, independence and knowledge 
of the Company to enable them to discharge 
their respective duties and responsibilities 
effectively.

The Group Executive Directors do not hold 
any Non-executive Director appointments or 
commitments required to be disclosed under 
the Code. 

CHAIRMAN AND MANAGING DIRECTOR
The roles of Group Chairman and Group 
Managing Director are separately held 
and there are clear written guidelines 
to support the division of responsibility 
between them. The Group Chairman is 
responsible for the effective conduct of 
the Board and shareholder meetings and 

for ensuring that each Director contributes 
to effective decision-making. The Group 
Managing Director has day-to-day executive 
responsibility for the running of the Group’s 
businesses. His role is to develop and  
deliver the strategy to enable the Group to 
meet its objectives. 

MEETINGS
The Board met five times during 2013/14 and 
there were no absences. 

In addition to the above formal meetings 
of the whole Board, the Non-executive 
Directors meet with the Group Chairman. 
The Group Managing Director and Group 
Finance Director are invited to attend these 
meetings in part, to provide an update on 
the business activities of the Group. The 
Non-executive Directors meet at least 
annually without the Group Chairman 
present, chaired by the Senior Independent 
Director.

Board papers and agendas are sent out 
in the week prior to each meeting, thus 
allowing sufficient time for detailed review 
and consideration of the documents 
beforehand. In addition, the Board is 
supplied with comprehensive management 
information on a regular basis. 

ELECTION AND RE-ELECTION OF DIRECTORS
The Articles of Association of the Company 
include the requirement for Directors to 
submit themselves to shareholders for 
re-election every three years. In addition, 
all Directors are subject to election by 
shareholders at the first opportunity after 
their appointment and thereafter at intervals 
of no more than three years.

However, in accordance with the 
requirements of the Code, all Directors offer 
themselves for re-election at the Annual 
General Meeting on 1 September 2014, 
other than David Howell who is standing 
down from the Board.

INDUCTION AND DEVELOPMENT
On appointment, Non-executive Directors 
are provided with a detailed induction 
programme. This covers an overview of the 
Group’s operations and its policies, corporate 
responsibility and corporate affairs issues, 
legal matters, and the opportunity to meet 
with Directors and key staff and to visit the 
Group’s sites.

No training needs were identified this year, 
although ongoing training is available to 
all Directors to meet their individual needs. 
Board members also receive guidance 
on regulatory matters and the corporate 
governance framework that the Group 
operates under.

Members of the Audit and Remuneration 
Committees received briefings from 
our auditors and remuneration advisers 
respectively to ensure they remain up to date 
with current regulations and developments.

All Directors have access to advice from 
the Company Secretary and independent 
professional advisers, at the Company’s 
expense, where specific expertise is required 
in the course of their duties. 

BOARD EVALUATION
The Code requires that the Board 
undertakes an annual evaluation of its own 
performance and that of its committees 
and individual directors with an externally 
facilitated evaluation conducted every three 
years. Having sought the services of an 
independent externally facilitated third party 
for the 2013 evaluation, the Board evaluation 
for 2014 was carried out by the Group 
Solicitor and covered:

•  Strategic matters

•   Board structure, committees and their 

operation

•  Succession planning

•  Induction and development

•   Assessment of the performance of 

individual committees and the Chairman

•  Shareholder communication

The unanimous outcome of the review was 
that the Board works very well and that all the 
Directors are passionate about the business, 
and that they enjoy their role on the Board. 

The Board has a pivotal role in preserving 
the organisation’s culture and ultimately 
its success. In line with all successful 
organisations, succession planning is seen as 
a key focus for the Company and the Board 
continues to evolve to address this issue. 
The autonomous structure of the Group also 
provides strength in depth which further 
mitigates this risk.

An action plan has been agreed by the Board 
to address the recommendations made from 
the review.

CONFLICTS OF INTEREST
In accordance with the Companies Act 2006, 
the Company’s Articles of Association allow 
the Board to authorise potential conflicts 
of interest that may arise and to impose 
such limits or conditions as it thinks fit. The 
decision to authorise a conflict of interest can 
only be made by non-conflicted Directors 
(those who have no interest in the matter 
being considered) and in making such a 
decision the Directors must act in a way they 

consider in good faith will be most likely to 
promote the Company’s success. 

The Company has established a procedure 
whereby actual and potential conflicts of 
interest of current and proposed roles to be 
undertaken by Directors of the Board with 
other organisations are regularly reviewed 
in respect of both the nature of those roles, 
and their time commitment, and for proper 
authorisation to be sought prior to the 
appointment of any new director. The Board 
consider these procedures to be working 
effectively.

INSURANCE
The Company had in place at 30 April 2014 
an appropriate policy which insures Directors 
against certain liabilities, including legal 
costs, which they may incur in carrying out 
their duties. This remains in place.

BOARD COMMITTEES 
The Board has delegated certain matters 
to individual Executives and to the 
specific committees of the Board; audit, 
remuneration and nomination. The main 
three Board Committees operate within 
clearly defined Terms of Reference pursuant 
to the provisions of the Code. The Terms 
of Reference can be downloaded from the 
section dealing with Investor Relations on the 
Berkeley website (www.berkeleygroup.co.uk). 
Copies are also available to shareholders on 
application to the Company Secretary. 

The responsibilities of the key Board 
committees are described below. 

EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE 
The Executive Committee meets monthly 
and reviews the financial and operating 
performance of all Group divisions and 
companies. The Group Managing Director, 
Rob Perrins, chairs this Committee and  
other members comprise, Tony Pidgley,  
Nick Simpkin, Karl Whiteman, Sean Ellis 
and Greg Fry alongside other senior 
management.

AUDIT COMMITTEE 
The Audit Committee is responsible for 
monitoring and reviewing the financial 
reporting and accounting policies of the 
Company, reviewing the adequacy of internal 
controls and the activities of the Group’s 
internal audit function and overseeing 
the relationship with the external auditor. 
The Audit Committee comprises five 
independent Non-executive Directors.  
The Committee is chaired by David Howell 
and the other members at 30 April 2014  
were Alison Nimmo, Andy Myers, Glyn Barker 
and Veronica Wadley. 

David Howell, Andy Myers and Glyn Barker 
are all considered to have recent and relevant 
experience. David Howell is qualified as a 
chartered accountant and was the Chief 
Financial Officer and a Main Board Director 
of lastminute.com plc; Andy Myers is 
qualified as a chartered accountant and is 
currently Chief Financial Officer at McLaren 
Group Limited; and Glyn Barker is also 
qualified as a chartered accountant, having 
previously held a number of senior posts 
within PwC including Managing Partner and 
Head of Assurance. Upon David Howell’s 
retirement from the Board at the Annual 
General Meeting on 1 September 2014, the 
Committee will be chaired by Andy Myers.

The Committee met formally on three 
occasions during the year to 30 April 2014 
with no absences. 

An explanation of the role and activities 
of the Audit committee during the year is 
contained in the Audit Committee report on 
pages 54 to 55.

REMUNERATION COMMITTEE 
The Remuneration Committee is responsible 
for determining the Company’s policy for 
Executive remuneration and the precise 
terms of employment and remuneration of 
the Executive Directors. 

At 30 April 2014, the Committee comprised 
Glyn Barker and Sir John Armitt who are  
both independent Non-executive Directors. 
The Committee was chaired by Glyn Barker. 
On 1 May 2014 Andy Myers was appointed to 
the Committee.

The Committee met formally on two 
occasions during the year to April 2014 with 
no absences.

No Director is involved in deciding his or 
her remuneration. The Executive Directors 
decide the remuneration of the Non-
executive Directors and the Committee takes 
into consideration the recommendations of 
the Group Managing Director and Group 
Finance Director regarding the remuneration 
of their Executive colleagues.

The principles and details of Directors’ 
remuneration are contained in the 
Remuneration Report on pages 56 to 80. 

NOMINATION COMMITTEE 
The Nomination Committee ensures that the 
membership and composition of the Board, 
including the balance of skills, is appropriate, 
as well as giving full consideration to 
succession planning on a regular basis.

The Committee is chaired by the Group 
Chairman, Tony Pidgley and the Independent 
Non-executive members at 30 April 2014 

50

51

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  GOVERNANCEBERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  GOVERNANCEGOVERNANCE CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REPORT continued

were David Howell, Sir John Armitt and 
Veronica Wadley. David Howell will step 
down from the Committee on 1 September 
2014.

The Committee met formally on two 
occasions during the year to 30 April 2014 
with no absences.

During the year, the activities of the 
Committee included considering and making 
recommendations to the Board regarding 
the membership of the Board committees 
and reviewing succession plans for the 
Executive team.

The process for identifying and 
recommending new appointments 
includes a combination of discussions 
and consultations, in addition to formal 
interviews, utilising the services of 
independent recruitment specialists, as 
appropriate. 

KEY RISKS AND INTERNAL CONTROL 
The Board acknowledges that it has overall 
responsibility for ensuring that the Group’s 
system of internal control comply with the UK 
Corporate Governance Code 2012 and for 
reviewing its effectiveness, at least annually. 

Internal control procedures are designed 
to manage rather than eliminate the risk 
of failure to achieve business objectives, 
and can only provide reasonable and 
not absolute assurance against material 
misstatement or loss. 

There are ongoing processes and procedures 
for identifying, evaluating and managing the 
significant risks faced by the Group. These 
processes and procedures were in place from 
the start of the financial year to the date on 
which the 2014 Annual Report and Accounts 
were approved and accord with the Turnbull 
guidance issued in 2005. 

The processes are regularly reviewed by the 
Board and include an annual review by the 
Directors of the operation and effectiveness 
of the system of internal control as part of its 
year end procedures. The key features of the 
system of internal control include: 

CLEAR ORGANISATIONAL STRUCTURE 
The Group operates through autonomous 
divisions and operating companies, each with 
its own board. Operating company boards 
meet on a weekly basis and divisional boards 
on a monthly basis, and comprehensive 
information is prepared for such meetings 
on a standardised basis to cover all aspects 
of the business. Formal reporting lines 
and delegated levels of authority exist 
within this structure and the review of risk 
and performance occurs at multiple levels 

throughout the operating companies, 
divisions and at Group. 

RISK ASSESSMENT 
Risk reporting is embedded within ongoing 
management reporting throughout the 
Group. At operating company and divisional 
level, Board meeting agendas and packs 
are structured around the key risks facing 
the Group. These risks include health and 
safety, sales, production (build cost and 
programme), land and planning, economic, 
regulatory and site specific matters.

In addition, there is a formalised process 
whereby each division produces quarterly 
risks and control reports that identify 
significant risks, the potential impact and 
the actions being taken to mitigate the risks. 
These risk reports are reviewed and updated 
regularly. 

A Group Risk Management Report is 
presented at each Group Main Board 
Meeting, setting out the current factors 
affecting the risk profile of the Group, the 
mitigation of these risks and the key changes 
to this risk profile since the last report. 

FINANCIAL REPORTING 
A comprehensive budgeting and real-time 
forecasting system, covering both profit 
and cash, operates within the Group. This 
enables executive management to view 
key financial and operating data on a daily 
basis. On a weekly and monthly basis more 
formal reporting up to the Group Executives 
is prepared. The results of all operating units 
are reported monthly and compared to 
budget and forecast. 

There is a consolidation process in place 
which ensures that there is an audit trail 
between the Group’s financial reporting 
system and the Group’s statutory financial 
statements. 

INVESTMENT AND CONTRACTING CONTROLS 
The Group has clearly defined guidelines 
for the purchase and sale of land within the 
Group, which include detailed environmental, 
planning and financial appraisal and are 
subject to executive authorisation. Rigorous 
procedures are also followed for the 
selection of consultants and contractors. 
The review and monitoring of all build 
programmes and budgets are a fundamental 
element of the Company’s financial  
reporting cycle.

POLICIES AND PROCEDURES 
Policies and procedures, including operating 
and financial controls, are detailed in policies 
and procedures manuals that are refreshed 
and improved as appropriate. Training to 
staff is given where necessary. 

CENTRAL FUNCTIONS 
Strong central functions, including Legal, 
Health & Safety and Company Secretarial, 
provide support and consistency to the 
rest of the Group. In addition, the principal 
treasury-related risks, decisions and control 
processes are managed by the Group 
Finance function, under the direction of the 
Group Finance Director. 

INTERNAL AUDIT 
Internal auditors are in place at divisional 
and Group level to provide assurance on the 
operation of the Group’s control framework. 

WHISTLEBLOWING 
The Group has a whistleblowing policy which 
has been communicated to all staff, where 
Directors, management and staff can report 
in confidence any concerns they may have of 
malpractice, financial irregularity, breaches of 
any Group procedures, or other matters. 

BRIBERY ACT 
The Board has responsibility for complying 
with the requirements of the Bribery Act 
2010 and is charged with overseeing the 
development and implementation of 
the Group’s policies and procedures and 
monitoring ongoing compliance. 

RELATIONS WITH SHAREHOLDERS
The Company encourages active dialogue 
with its current and prospective shareholders 
through ongoing meetings with institutional 
investors. Major shareholders have the 
opportunity to meet all Directors after the 
Annual General Meeting in addition to 
individual meetings with the Company. 

Shareholders are also kept up to date 
with the Company’s activities through the 
Annual and Interim Reports and Interim 
Management Statements. In addition, the 
corporate website gives information on the 
Group and latest news, including regulatory 
announcements. The presentations made 
after the announcement of the preliminary 
and interim results are also available on the 
website. 

The Board is kept informed of the views 
of the shareholders through periodic 
reports from the Company’s broker UBS. 
Additionally, the Non-executive Directors 
have the opportunity to attend the bi-annual 
analyst presentations. 

The Senior Independent Director is available 
to shareholders if they have concerns where 
contact through the normal channels has 
failed or when such contact is inappropriate. 

ANNUAL GENERAL MEETING 
All shareholders are invited to participate in 
the Annual General Meeting (“AGM”) where 

the Group Chairman, the Group Managing 
Director and the Chairmen of the Audit, 
Remuneration and Nomination Committees 
will be available to answer questions and 
will also be available for discussions with 
shareholders both prior to and after the 
meeting. 

In accordance with the Code, the Company 
arranges for the Annual Report and 
Accounts and related papers to be posted 
to shareholders so as to allow at least 20 
working days for consideration prior to the 
AGM. 

The Company complies with the provisions 
of the Code relating to the disclosure of 
proxy votes, which, including abstentions, are 
declared at the AGM after each resolution 
has been dealt with on a show of hands and 
are announced to the Stock Exchange shortly 
after the close of the meeting. The Company 
also complies with the requirements of the 
Code with the separation of resolutions and 
the attendance of the Chairmen of the Board 
Committees. 

The terms and conditions of appointment for 
the Non-executive Directors, which set out 
their expected time commitment, in addition 
to the service contracts for the Executive 
Directors, are available for inspection at the 
AGM and during normal business hours at 
the Company’s registered office. 

52

53

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  GOVERNANCEBERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  GOVERNANCEGOVERNANCEAUDIT COMMITTEE REPORT

The Board of Directors presents its Audit 
Committee Report for the year ended  
30 April 2014 which has been prepared on 
the recommendation of the Audit Committee 
(“the Committee”).

The report has been prepared in accordance 
with the requirements of the UK Corporate 
Governance Code, Schedule 8 of the Large 
& Medium-Sized Companies and Groups 
(Accounts and Reports) Regulations 2008, 
and the Listing Rules of the Financial 
Conduct Authority.

Details of the composition, experience and 
the number of meetings of the Committee 
are reported on page 51 of the Corporate 
Governance Report.

ROLE AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE AUDIT
COMMITTEE
The Committee has formal Terms of 
Reference which set out its role and the 
authority delegated to it by the Board.  
The key responsibilities of the Committee  
are as follows:

•	 	Financial Reporting 

Monitoring	the	integrity	of	the	financial	
reporting of the Company and reviewing 
significant	financial	reporting	issues	and	
accounting policies;

•	 	Internal Control and Internal Audit 

Reviewing the adequacy and effectiveness 
of the Group’s internal control and risk 
management systems and monitoring the 
effectiveness of the Group’s internal audit 
function; and

•	 	External Audit 

Overseeing the relationship with the 
external auditor, including appointment, 
removal and fees, and ensuring the 
auditor’s independence and the 
effectiveness of the audit process.

This report considers each of these 
responsibilities in turn, and how the 
Committee has discharged them during  
the year.

FINANCIAL REPORTING
At each of the Audit Committee meetings, 
the Group Finance Director Nick Simpkin 
presented, and the Committee debated, the 
results and business plan of the Group and 
any	significant	financial	reporting	judgements	
relevant to this.

The Committee reviewed, prior to their 
publication,	the	financial	disclosures	in	
the Group’s Annual Report and Accounts, 
Preliminary Announcement, Interim Report 
and the contents of interim management 
statements issued during the year. 

The Committee’s review incorporated 
consideration of the appropriateness of the 
relevant	accounting	policies	and	financial	
reporting	judgements	adopted	therein.

The Committee’s review of the Annual Report 
concentrated on whether, taken as a whole, 
it was fair, balanced and understandable and 
provided the information necessary for users 
of the Annual Report to assess the Group’s 
business strategy and performance.

The views of the Group’s auditor, which 
was in attendance at each meeting of the 
Committee during the year, were taken  
into account in reaching its conclusions on 
these matters.

The	significant	matters	considered	by	the	
Committee in 2014 included:

•	 	Carrying value of inventories and 

margin recognition 
Inventories comprise land not under 
development, work in progress and 
completed units, which are held in the 
balance sheet at the lower of cost and 
net realisable value. This demands a 
periodic assessment by the management 
team of each of Berkeley’s sites which 
is sensitive to assumptions in terms of 
future sales prices and construction costs 
and recognises the inherently cyclical 
nature of the property market and the 
risks of delivery. These assumptions are 
also relevant to the determination of 
profit	recognised	on	properties	sold.
The conclusions of this assessment were 
reported by exception to the Committee 
in	a	financial	overview	paper	prior	to	
release of the Group’s annual and interim 
results.

•	  Provisions 

The Committee recognises that 
accounting for provisions relies on 
management	judgement	in	estimating	
the	quantum	and	timing	of	outflows	of	
resources to settle any associated legal 
or constructive obligations. The Group 
holds provisions for post-completion 
development obligations, onerous 
lease and estate liabilities. The basis 
for determining these provisions was 
presented to the Committee for their 
consideration. The Committee reviewed 
the relevant papers and discussed the 
assumptions underlying this determination 
with management and the Group’s 
external auditor and concluded that it was 
satisfied	that	the	assumptions	adopted	
were appropriate. A table of movements 
in provisions over the period is included in 
note	18	to	the	financial	statements.

•	  Revenue recognition 

 The Committee recognises that the 
Group’s accounting policy for revenue 
recognition, namely that properties are 
treated	as	sold	and	profits	are	recognised	
when contracts are exchanged and 
building work is physically complete, 
involves	an	element	of	judgement	in	
determining the point at which building 
work is physically complete. The 
Committee reviewed the quantum of 
properties not yet legally completed at 
each	balance	sheet	date	in	conjunction	
with the review undertaken by the Group’s 
external auditor and concluded that the 
judgements	were	appropriate.	

Other matters considered by the Committee 
included management’s assessment of the 
going concern status of the Group at the 
balance sheet date and the accounting 
for share-based payments, although no 
new share options have been granted in 
the year. The Committee concurred with 
management’s adopted approach on all of 
these matters.

Since the year end, the Committee has 
completed its review of the 2014 Annual 
Report	and	has	confirmed	to	the	Board	
that it considers it to be fair, balanced and 
understandable.

INTERNAL CONTROL AND INTERNAL AUDIT
The Committee undertook its annual review 
of the Group’s Internal Control Framework 
during the year. This review focused on the 
system of risk management and internal 
control in place which is explained in 
more detail on page 52 of the Corporate 
Governance Report, and covered:

–  the key risks facing the Group;

–   the key elements of the Group’s control 

processes to mitigate these risks;

–   the operations and effectiveness of 

internal audit.

A paper was also presented to the 
Committee which summarised the Group’s 
consideration, controls and monitoring of 
fraud risk across its activities.

The Committee also considered any internal 
control recommendations raised by the 
Group’s auditors during the course of the 
external audit and the company’s response  
to dealing with such recommendations.

A report summarising the recent activities  
of the Internal Audit function within Berkeley 
was presented to each of the Committee 
meetings during the year. These reports 
covered:

best practice under the UK Corporate 
Governance Code 2012, and will monitor the 
proposals of the Financial Reporting Council 
and the European Union in determining its 
future approach to re-tendering.

D HOWELL
CHAIRMAN, AUDIT COMMITTEE
11 JULY 2014

–	 	a	summary	of	the	key	findings	arising	from	
the most recent formal internal audits 
undertaken;

–   management responses to any control 

weaknesses	identified,	the	closure	of	any	
open items and any recurring themes;

–   the outcome of other operational review 
work undertaken by the internal audit 
function;

–   the internal audit plan for the coming year, 
for debate with and the approval of the 
Committee.

The	Committee	was	satisfied	that	the	scope,	
extent and effectiveness of the Internal Audit 
function are appropriate for the Group.

EXTERNAL AUDIT
During the year, in accordance with 
evolving best practice, the Committee 
undertook a competitive tender process 
for the audit of the Company and its 
subsidiaries for the year ended 30 April 2014. 
PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP (“PwC”) and its 
predecessor	firm	had	been	Berkeley’s	auditor	
since	the	Company	first	listed	in	1984.

The tender process sought to assess a 
combination of the tendering parties’ 
understanding of the business, industry and 
related risks, their intended approach, the 
skills and experience of the proposed team 
and a comprehensive plan to manage a 
successful transition.

dialogue between the Chairman of the 
Audit Committee and the external auditors 
prior to each Audit Committee meeting 
and, after each meeting, the opportunity for 
the Committee to meet with the external 
auditors without the Executive Directors and 
management present.

INDEPENDENCE OF THE EXTERNAL
AUDITORS
As part of its audit strategy presentation, 
and through the audit tender process, KPMG 
identified	the	safeguards	in	place	within	its	
internal processes and procedures to protect, 
in respect of its own role, the independence 
of its audit.

The Committee has a policy on the use of 
the auditors for non-audit services in order 
to safeguard auditor independence and the 
ratio of audit fees (including the fees for the 
Interim Review) to non-audit fees should be 
no greater than 1:1. The ratio for the year 
ended 30 April 2014 was within the limits of 
this ratio. Audit and non-audit fee disclosures 
are set out in Note 4 of the Consolidated 
Financial Statements.

Any departure from this ratio will only be as 
a consequence of transactional work, where 
the Committee considers it is right for the 
auditors to undertake such work where the 
reasons for doing so are compelling, such as 
where:

i)  it is proprietary to them;

Following this process, KPMG LLP (“KPMG”) 
was	appointed	to	fill	a	casual	vacancy	in	
accordance with the Companies Act 2006.

ii)   they have pre-existing knowledge and 
experience that precludes the use of 
alternative	firms;

APPROACH
KPMG presented its audit strategy at the 
first	Audit	Committee	meeting	following	
their appointment. The strategy document 
identified	its	assessment	of	the	key	risks	of	
the business for the purpose of the audit, 
the scope of their work and updated the 
Committee on regulatory changes for 
the current year. KPMG also updated the 
Committee on its interaction with PwC in 
respect of the handover of the external audit.

KPMG reported to the Committee at the 
year end, prior to the public announcement 
of the Company’s results, in which it set out 
its	assessment	of	the	Company’s	judgements	
and estimates in respect of these risks and 
any	other	findings	arising	from	its	work.	
Its work also included a review of the 
adequacy of Berkeley’s external reporting for 
compliance with prevailing regulations.

The external auditors have open recourse 
to the Non-executive Directors should 
they consider it necessary. There is private 

iii)  the nature of the transaction is such that 

the Group’s auditors are the only practical 
solution.

Non-audit work carried out by all accounting 
firms,	including	the	auditors,	is	formally	
reported to the Audit Committee at each 
meeting. There is open dialogue between 
KPMG	and	the	Company’s	senior	finance	
team to monitor any proposed new 
instructions. 

The Committee has concluded that 
it is comfortable that the auditors are 
independent.

APPOINTMENT OF KPMG
On completion of the audit, the Committee 
reviewed the performance and effectiveness 
of KPMG with feedback from executive 
management. The Committee has resolved 
to propose KPMG’s appointment at the 2014 
Annual General Meeting.

In deciding to tender the audit this year, 
the Committee was mindful of evolving 

54

55

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  GOVERNANCEBERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  GOVERNANCEGOVERNANCEG
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

DIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION REPORT

ANNUAL STATEMENT FROM CHAIRMAN OF REMUNERATION COMMITTEE 

DIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION POLICY 

Dear Shareholder

This Remuneration Report is split into two parts:

•	 	The	Directors’	Remuneration	Policy	sets	out	Berkeley’s	policy	and	the	key	factors	that	were	taken	into	account	in	setting	the	policy.	The	

Directors’	Remuneration	Policy	will	be	subject	to	a	binding	vote	at	the	AGM	in	September	2014	and	will	apply	for	a	period	of	three	years.

•	 	The	Annual	Report	on	Remuneration	sets	out	payments	and	awards	made	to	the	Directors	and	details	the	link	between	Company	

performance	and	remuneration	for	the	2013/14	financial	year.	The	Annual	Report	on	Remuneration	together	with	this	letter	is	subject	
to	an	advisory	shareholder	vote	at	the	AGM	in	September	2014.	The	sections	of	this	report	that	have	been	subject	to	audit	are	labelled	
accordingly.

CORPORATE PERFORMANCE
Berkeley	has	delivered	strong	performance	and	growth	during	2013/14,	with	the	key	highlights	being:

•	 Pre-tax	return	on	shareholders’	equity	of	27.5%	(2013:	22.4%)

•	 Dividends	paid	to	shareholders	of	£195	million	(2013:	£20	million)

•	 Future	anticipated	gross	margin	in	the	land	bank	up	5.7%	to	£3,014	million	(2013:	£2,852	million)

•	 Basic	earnings	per	share	increased	by	38.6%	to	221.8	pence	(2013:	160.0	pence)

•	 Net	asset	value	per	share	increased	by	5.6%	to	1,065.6	pence	(2013:	1,009.1	pence)

The	results	underline	the	Group’s	aim	of	balancing	earnings	in	the	near	term	and	creating	a	sustainable	business,	delivering	value	to	
shareholders	over	the	long	term.

Berkeley’s	Return	on	Equity	compared	with	the	sector	over	the	last	six	years	illustrates	the	relative	performance	of	the	Company:

Company	
Berkeley	
Sector	highest	
Sector	lowest	
Sector	average	(excluding	Berkeley)	

2008/09	
16.2%	
16.2%	
(73.4%)	
(26.0%)	

2009/10	
13.3%	
13.3%	
(44.2%)	
(18.1%)	

2010/11	
15.3%	
15.3%	
(6.2%)	
1.0%	

2011/12	
21.2%	
21.2%	
(0.4%)	
4.8%	

2012/13	
22.4%	
22.4%	
3.4%	
8.5%	

2013/14
27.5%
27.5%
3.5%
11.4%

Return	on	Equity

Berkeley’s	remuneration	policy	aims	to	encourage,	reward	and	retain	the	Executives	and	ensure	that	their	actions	are	aligned	with	the	
Company’s	strategy.	

In	particular,	the	emphasis	on	performance	related	pay	aligns	the	Executives	with	the	performance	of	the	business	which	is	coupled	with	long	
term	incentives	that	lock	in	the	Executive	team	for	up	to	10	years	which	is	far	longer	than	is	typical	in	most	publicly	listed	companies.	

INCENTIVE OUTCOMES IN 2013/14
The	key	incentive	outcomes	from	the	performance	this	year	are:

•	 Each	Executive	Director	earned	the	maximum	annual	contribution	under	the	Bonus	Plan;

•	 	The	awards	under	Part	A	of	the	2009	LTIP	vested	during	the	year.	The	exercise	of	these	awards	resulted	in	an	increase	in	shareholding	for	 

A	W	Pidgley,	R	C	Perrins	and	G	J	Fry.

OPERATION OF POLICY IN 2014/15
There	are	no	changes	to	the	operation	of	the	policy	for	2014/15.

The	Executive	Directors	have	received	salary	increases	for	2014/15	of	approximately	3%,	compared	to	average	salary	increases	across	the	
Group	of	6.1%.

NEW BONUS PLAN FOR 2015/16
The	Committee	is	seeking	shareholder	approval	for	a	new	Bonus	Plan	at	the	September	2014	AGM	which	will	form	part	of	the	policy	for	the	
financial	year	2015/16	and	subsequent	years.	Details	of	the	new	Bonus	Plan	are	set	out	in	the	Notice	of	AGM	and	it	is	proposed	that	the	Plan	
will	operate	on	the	same	principles	as	the	existing	Bonus	Plan.

IN CONCLUSION
I	look	forward	to	receiving	your	support	for	the	resolution	seeking	approval	of	the	Annual	Report	on	Remuneration	at	our	forthcoming	AGM	as	
well	as	on	the	Remuneration	Policy	applicable	to	our	Directors	which	will	apply	from	the	forthcoming	AGM	in	September	2014.

GLYN BARKER
CHAIRMAN, REMUNERATION COMMITTEE 

This	section	of	the	Remuneration	Report	contains	details	of	the	Company’s	Directors’	Remuneration	Policy	that	will	govern	the	Company’s	
future	remuneration	payments.	The	policy	described	in	this	part	is	intended	to	apply	for	three	years	and	will	be	applicable	from	the	Company’s	
AGM	in	September	2014	subject	to	approval	by	shareholders	at	the	AGM.	The	policy	part	will	be	displayed	on	the	Company’s	website,	in	the	
investor	relations	area,	immediately	after	the	2014	AGM.

The	Committee	has	established	the	policy	on	the	remuneration	of	the	Executive	Directors;	the	Board	has	established	a	policy	on	the	
remuneration	of	the	Non-executive	Directors.	

REMUNERATION POLICY
The	objective	of	Berkeley’s	remuneration	policy	is	to	encourage,	reward	and	retain	the	current	Executives	and	ensure	their	actions	are	aligned	
with	the	Company’s	strategy.	The	core	philosophies	of	the	policy	are:

•	 	Fixed remuneration:	The	Committee	sets	salaries	for	the	Executive	Directors	based	on	their	experience,	role,	individual	and	corporate	

performance.	Salaries	on	appointment	to	the	Board	are	set	at	a	lower	quartile	level	of	the	comparator	group	which,	based	on	appropriate	
levels	of	individual	and	corporate	performance,	will	be	increased	with	experience	gained	over	time.

•	 	Annual performance related pay:	The	Committee	believes	that	shareholders’	interests	are	best	served	by	remuneration	packages	that	

have	a	large	emphasis	on	performance-related	pay	which	encourage	the	Executive	Directors	to	focus	on	delivering	the	business	strategy.

•	  Long-term sustainable performance:	The	long-term	incentives	which	extend	to	2021	have	been	designed	to	lock	in	the	Executive	team	
for	a	far	longer	period	than	is	typical	in	most	publicly	listed	companies.	This	helps	to	ensure	that	the	Executive	team	are	focused	on	
generating	long-term	sustainable	value	for	shareholders,	not	just	on	meeting	short	term	performance	targets.

•	 	Substantial equity holdings:	In	order	to	align	the	interests	of	Executive	Directors	and	shareholders,	the	reward	strategy	is	designed	so	
that,	provided	performance	is	delivered,	the	Executive	team	become	material	(in	relation	to	their	overall	compensation)	shareholders	in	 
the	Company.	

REMUNERATION POSITIONING 
The	policy	is	to	set	the	main	elements	of	the	Executive	Directors’	remuneration	package	against	the	following	quartiles	in	the	Company’s	
comparator	group:

Base salary

Benefits

Pension

Annual Bonus

Long-term Incentives

Experience	&	Role

Market	practice

Lower	quartile

Upper	decile

Upper	decile

For	the	purposes	of	benchmarking	remuneration	the	Committee	used	the	following	comparator	group	of	companies	for	the	2014/15	 
financial	year.	

Amec	PLC

Bellway	PLC

Marshalls	PLC

Taylor	Wimpey	PLC

Balfour	Beatty	PLC

Bovis	Homes	Group	PLC

Persimmon	PLC

Travis	Perkins	PLC

Barratt	Developments	PLC

Carillion	PLC

Redrow	PLC

The	Committee	also	considers	the	remuneration	in	the	FTSE	250	as	an	additional	benchmark	to	the	main	comparator	group	set	out	above	
due	to	its	relatively	small	number	of	constituent	companies.	On	an	annual	basis	the	Committee	will	review	the	comparator	groups	to	ensure	
that	they	remain	appropriate.	

REMUNERATION POLICY DISCRETION
The	Committee	has	discretion	in	several	areas	of	policy	as	set	out	in	this	report.	The	Committee	may	also	exercise	operational	and	
administrative	discretions	under	relevant	plan	rules	approved	by	shareholders.	In	addition,	the	Committee	has	the	discretion	to	amend	
policy	with	regard	to	minor	or	administrative	matters	where	it	would	be,	in	the	opinion	of	the	Committee,	disproportionate	to	seek	or	await	
shareholder	approval.

56

57

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  GOVERNANCEBERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  GOVERNANCEGOVERNANCE	
DIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION REPORT continued

FUTURE POLICY – EXECUTIVE DIRECTORS 
The	table	below	sets	out	the	key	elements	of	the	policy	for	Executive	Directors:

Objective and link 
to strategy

Operation

Maximum opportunity

Performance condition and assessment

There	are	no	performance	conditions	on	
salary.	However,	the	performance	of	the	
individual	and	the	Company	are	reflected	
in	the	salary	they	are	paid.

Base salary

Core	element	of	
remuneration,	set	
at	a	level	which	
is	sufficiently	
competitive	
to	recruit	and	
retain	Executive	
Directors	of	the	
appropriate	calibre	
and	experience	
to	achieve	the	
Company’s	business	
strategy.	

Policy: Experience 
and role

Salaries	are	reviewed	annually	and	
any	changes	are	effective	from	 
1	May	each	year.

In	setting	levels	of	base	salary,	the	
Committee	takes	into	account	
the	following	factors	in	setting	
individual	salary	levels:

•	 	the	individual	Executive	

Director’s	experience	and	
responsibilities;

•	 	the	levels	of	base	salary	
for	similar	positions	
with	comparable	status,	
responsibility	and	skills	in	
organisations	of	broadly	similar	
size	and	complexity;

•	 	the	performance	of	the	

individual	Executive	Director	
and	the	Group;

•	 	pay	and	conditions	throughout	

the	Group.

The	annual	salary	for	each	
Executive	Director	is	set	out	in	the	
statement	of	implementation	of	
remuneration	policy	for	2014/15	on	
page	77.

The	Committee	has	a	policy	on	
appointment	of	bringing	Executive	
Directors	on	to	the	Board	at	
lower	quartile	levels	of	salary	and	
increasing	salaries	as	experience	
is	gained	and	performance	in	the	
role	can	be	evaluated.	

Where	an	Executive	is	extremely	
experienced	and	has	a	long	track	
record	of	proven	performance	
salaries	may	be	in	the	upper	decile.

In	setting	salaries,	the	Committee	
looks	at	companies	of	broadly	
similar	size	and	complexity,	in	
particular	those	companies	within	
the	comparator	group	and	those	in	
the	FTSE	250.	

In	general	salary	rises	will	be	
limited	to	the	level	provided	to	
employees	of	the	Company	as	a	
whole.

Benefits

To	provide	
competitive	levels	
of	employment	
benefits.

In	line	with	market	practice,	the	
Company’s	policy	is	to	provide	
Executive	Directors	with	the	
following	additional	benefits:

Benefit	values	vary	year	on	year	
depending	on	premiums	and	the	
maximum	value	is	the	cost	of	the	
provision	of	these	benefits.

None.

Policy: Market 
practice

•	 	a	fully	expensed	company	car	or	

cash	allowance	alternative;

•	 medical	insurance;	

•	 	other	benefits	may	be	provided	

from	time	to	time.	

Benefits	are	reviewed	periodically	
to	ensure	they	remain	market	
competitive.

The	payments	are	not	included	
in	salary	for	the	purposes	of	
calculating	any	benefit	or	level	
of	participation	in	incentive	
arrangements.

G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

Objective and link 
to strategy

Operation

Maximum opportunity

Performance condition and assessment

Annual Bonus

The	Bonus	Plan	
aligns	rewards	to	
the	key	objectives	
linked	to	short	
to medium term 
performance	
whilst	ensuring	
that there is a 
balance	between	
incentivising	the	
Executive	Directors,		
providing	a	
sustainable	ongoing	
level	of	return	to	
shareholders and 
ensuring	the	long-
term	sustainability	
of	the	Company.

The	Notice	of	AGM	
sets out details 
of	the	proposed	
replacement	for	the	
Bonus	Plan	which	
will	form	part	of	
the	policy,	subject	
to shareholder 
approval,	for	the	
financial	year	
2015/16	and	
subsequent	years.

Policy: Upper 
decile

At	the	beginning	of	the	plan	
period	of	five	financial	years	(first	
bonus	year	started	in	FY	2010/11),	
participants	had	a	plan	account	to	
which	Company	contributions	were	
made.	

No	Company	contribution	is	made	
to	a	participant’s	plan	account	
unless	the	annual	performance	
criteria	are	met.

The	maximum	bonus	potential	for	
all	Executive	Directors	is	300%	of	
salary	for	any	plan	year.

At	threshold	performance	no	
bonus	can	be	earned.

At	target	performance	50%	of	the	
maximum	bonus	can	be	earned.

Bonus	is	earned	on	a	straight	line	
basis	between	points.

The	Company	contribution	will	be	
set	annually	as	a	percentage	of	
salary	for	each	Executive	Director.

Having	regard	to	the	strategy	of	
the	Company,	the	Committee	will	
set:

•	 	The	performance	levels	
(including	minimum	
performance	thresholds)	for	
the	performance	conditions	for	
each	plan	year;

•	 	The	maximum	annual	Company	
contribution	for	each	participant	
for	the	plan	year.

Participants	will	be	entitled	to	an	
annual	payment	of	50%	of	their	
plan	account	at	the	end	of	each	
financial	year.	All	balances	will	
be	deferred	in	shares	or	notional	
shares.	At	the	end	of	the	five	year	
plan	period	100%	of	the	balance	of	
participants’	accounts	will	be	paid.

Dividends	paid	during	a	
financial	year	will	be	added	to	a	
participant’s	plan	account	on	an	
annual	basis.

There	are	two	types	of	performance	
condition;	Group	and	Divisional.	Both	
are	measured	at	the	end	of	each	financial	
year.

The	bonus	payable	to	each	of	the	Group	
Chairman,	Group	Managing	Director	and	
Group	Finance	Director	is	determined	by	
reference	to	Group	performance.	

For	the	Divisional	Directors,	50%	of	the	
potential	bonus	payable	is	determined	
by	reference	to	Group	performance	
and	50%	by	reference	to	Divisional	
PBT	performance	for	which	they	have	
responsibility.

The	Group	performance	condition	is	a	
matrix	of	Return	on	Equity	(ROE)	and	
Land	Bank	Growth.	

The	Divisional	performance	condition	is	
based	upon	Divisional	Profit	before	Tax	
(PBT).	

There	is	a	risk	adjustment	mechanism	
built	into	the	operation	of	the	Bonus	
Plan.	If	the	threshold	levels	of	ROE,	Land	
Bank	Growth	or	Divisional	PBT	are	not	
met	for	any	financial	year	during	the	five	
years	of	operation	of	the	Bonus	Plan	part	
of	a	participant’s	plan	account	will	be	
forfeited.	This	adjustment	mechanism	
ensures:

•	 	Performance	must	be	maintained	
over	the	five	years	of	operation	of	
the	Bonus	Plan	or	the	value	in	the	
participant’s	plan	account	will	not	
increase;

•	 	If	there	is	a	material	deterioration	

in	performance,	50%	of	the	balance	
of	the	participant’s	account	will	be	
forfeited.

The	Committee	has	the	discretion	to	
adjust	targets	or	weightings	for	any	
exceptional	events	that	may	occur	during	
the	year.

The	Committee	intends	to	provide	full	
prospective	and	retrospective	disclosure	
of	Group	performance	targets.	The	
Committee	is	of	the	view	that	the	
Divisional	performance	targets	are	
commercially	sensitive	both	at	the	time	
of	setting	the	targets	and	at	the	point	
when	they	are	measured	and	the	bonus	
determined.	It	is	therefore	the	opinion	of	
the	Committee	that	these	Targets	cannot	
be	disclosed	for	a	material	period	of	time.

58

59

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  GOVERNANCEBERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  GOVERNANCEGOVERNANCEDIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION REPORT continued

Objective and link 
to strategy

Operation

Long-Term Incentive Plan

Maximum opportunity

Performance condition and assessment

No	Plan	available	
for	new	grants	
during	the	Policy	
Period. 

Policy: Upper 
decile

Pension

To	provide	
competitive	levels	of	
retirement	benefit.	

Policy: Lower 
quartile

The	maximum	number	of	shares	approved	by	shareholders	under	The	Berkeley	Group	Holdings	plc	2011	Long-Term	
Incentive	Plan	has	been	granted.	Therefore,	no	additional	awards	can	be	made	under	this	Plan	(unless	on	cessation	
of	employment	by	an	existing	participant	shares	become	available).

No	other	Long	Term	Incentive	Plan	arrangement	will	be	implemented	by	the	Company	during	the	Policy	Period.	

The	maximum	contribution	or	
payment	in	lieu	is	25%	of	salary.

None.

The	annual	rate	for	each	Executive	
Director	is	set	out	in	the	statement	
of	implementation	of	remuneration	
policy	for	2014/15	on	page	77.

The	Company’s	policy	is	either	to	
provide	a	contribution	to	a	pension	
arrangement	or	provide	payments	
in	lieu	of	pension.

Messrs	Pidgley,	Perrins,	Fry	and	
Whiteman	currently	receive	
payments	in	lieu	of	pension.

Messrs	Simpkin	and	Ellis	currently	
receive	a	pension	contribution.	

All	payments	in	lieu	of	pension	are	
subject	to	income	tax	and	national	
insurance.	

Pension	is	not	included	in	salary	
figures	for	the	purposes	of	
determining	any	other	benefit	
entitlement.	

Shareholding requirement

To ensure that 
Executive	Directors’	
interests	are	aligned	
with	those	of	
shareholders	over	a	
longer	time	horizon.	

Policy: Market 
practice

The	Committee	operates	a	
system	of	shareholder	guidelines	
to	encourage	long-term	share	
ownership	by	the	Executive	
Directors.

This	should	be	achieved	within	five	
years	of	appointment	for	Executive	
Directors.

In	the	case	of	the	Group	Chairman	
this	is	400%	of	base	salary,	for	other	
Executive	Directors	200%	of	base	
salary.	The	Committee	retains	the	
discretion	to	increase	shareholding	
requirements.

Shareholdings	as	at	30	April	2014	
are	provided	on	page	75.

None.

NOTES TO THE FUTURE POLICY TABLE
RATIONALE BEHIND SELECTION OF PERFORMANCE MEASURES AND TARGETS FOR BONUS PLAN
The	annual	bonus	plan	measures	provide	direct	alignment	with	the	short	to	medium-term	strategic	objectives	of	the	Company:

Two Group performance targets	–	The	balance	of	operating	a	return	based	measure	(ROE)	and	a	value	based	measure	(Land	Bank	Growth)	
should	ensure	that	there	is	a	balance	between	incentivising	the	Executive	Directors	to	provide	a	sustainable	ongoing	level	of	return	to	
shareholders	whilst	ensuring	the	long-term	sustainability	of	the	Company,	as	follows:

•	 	the	Bonus	Plan	incentivises	the	delivery	of	increased	profits	in	order	to	achieve	ROE	at	the	same	time	as	growing	the	land	bank.	It	should	be	
noted	that	the	ROE	will	be	set	from	a	challenging	base	as	the	Company	has	not	taken	any	land	write	downs	as	is	the	case	with	the	majority	
of	its	competitors;

•	 	ROE	is	a	compound	measure	and	therefore	if	shareholder	funds	are	reinvested	and	not	paid	as	dividends,	earnings	growth	will	be	

compounded	to	achieve	the	targets;

•	 	the	fact	that	the	Bonus	Plan	targets	also	include	growth	in	the	land	bank	value,	means	that	Executive	Directors	are	encouraged	to	acquire	

land	in	the	current	market	on	favourable	terms	as	well	as	maximise	sustainable	profit	growth;

•	 	ROE	as	a	measure	highlights	the	inefficiency	of	retaining	surplus	cash	on	the	balance	sheet.	In	order	to	deliver	the	targeted	level	of	returns,	

this	will	encourage	the	Company	to	invest	or	return	cash	to	shareholders.

Level of targets	–	The	Committee	wishes	to	incentivise	the	Executive	Directors	to	achieve	a	good	level	of	returns	to	shareholders	whilst	
ensuring	the	long-term	sustainability	of	the	Company.	Therefore	the	targets	set	have	to	take	into	account	an	appropriate	level	of	risk.	The	
Bonus	Plan	allows	a	close	tailoring	by	the	Committee	of	the	performance	conditions	to	the	budget	and	performance	of	the	Company	for	each	
financial	year.

Divisional PBT targets –	The	Divisional	targets	were	chosen	to	ensure	the	Divisional	Directors	are	appropriately	focused	on	the	profitability	
of	their	respective	Divisions	which	ultimately	enhance	the	delivery	of	returns	to	shareholders.	The	targets	are	set	by	the	Committee	at	
the	beginning	of	the	financial	year	at	a	level	which	is	challenging	taking	into	account	the	potential	level	of	bonus	payments,	the	market,	
development	availability	and	other	relevant	issues.	

RECOVERY PROVISIONS
Under	the	terms	of	the	Bonus	Plan,	there	is	a	risk	adjustment	mechanism	built	in	so	that	should	threshold	levels	of	performance	not	be	
achieved,	50%	of	the	balance	of	the	participant’s	account	will	be	forfeited.	

No	recovery	provisions	apply	to	salary,	benefits	and	pension.

CHANGES TO REMUNERATION POLICY FROM PREVIOUS POLICY
There	have	been	no	changes	to	the	operation,	maximum	opportunity	or	performance	measures	in	relation	to	the	salary,	annual	bonus,	pension	
and	other	benefits.

DIFFERENCES IN REMUNERATION POLICY FOR ALL EMPLOYEES
The	Group	seeks	to	establish	remuneration	packages	that	will	attract,	retain	and	motivate	high	quality	employees.	Salary	and	benefit	packages	
for	all	employees	are	linked	to	both	individual	and	business	performance.	

The	Company’s	business	comprises	of	a	number	of	operating	Divisions.	The	annual	and	longer	term	cash	based	compensation	arrangements	
for	these	other	senior	employees	of	the	Company	are	therefore	linked	to	the	performance	of	the	relevant	Division	for	which	they	work.	Some	
elements	of	the	cash	bonus	plans	are	annual	while	other	elements	are	deferred	to	ensure	long-term	consistent	delivery	by	each	Division.	It	
is	the	view	of	both	the	Committee	and	the	Board	as	a	whole	that	these	arrangements	are	very	effective	at	ensuring	the	delivery	of	Divisional	
performance	for	which	these	senior	employees	are	responsible.

All	other	eligible	employees	participate	in	bonus	plans,	which,	together	with	salary	reviews	linked	to	business	performance,	enable	all	
employees	to	share	in	the	success	of	the	Group.

ELEMENTS OF PREVIOUS POLICY THAT WILL CONTINUE TO APPLY
The	following	subsisting	awards	will	continue	to	operate	on	the	terms	and	conditions	set	out	in	the	relevant	plan	rules,	as	approved	by	
shareholders	in	relation	to	the	2009	LTIP	and	2011	LTIP.	Full	details	of	the	subsisting	awards	are	set	out	in	previous	year’s	Committee	Reports.	

Awards	under	these	arrangements	do	not	form	part	of	the	ongoing	remuneration	policy;	however	payments	may	be	made	in	the	future	
subject	to	the	achievement	of	the	relevant	performance	conditions.

Objective and link 
to strategy

Operation

Maximum opportunity

Performance condition 
and assessment

Awards granted under the Berkeley Group Holdings plc 2009 Long-Term Incentive Plan (2009 LTIP)

The	2009	LTIP	aligns	
Executive	Director	
interests with those 
of	shareholders	
by	focusing	
on	delivering	
sustainable	
superior returns to 
shareholders.

Approved	by	
shareholders at 
the	2009	EGM	and	
amended at the 
2011	AGM.

Further	details	on	
the	2009	LTIP	are	
set	out	in	the	2009	
Notice	of	EGM	
and	2011	Notice	of	
AGM.	

Following	shareholder	approval	on	15	April	2009,	a	
maximum	of	7,100,000	shares	were	capable	of	being	
granted	under	Part	B	of	the	2009	LTIP.	

The	grants	under	Part	B	of	the	2009	LTIP	will	vest	in	two	
tranches,	subject	to	certain	conditions:

•	 50%	on	15	April	2015;

•	 50%	on	15	April	2016.

Shareholder	approval	was	received	at	the	2011	AGM	to	
amend	the	rules	of	the	2009	LTIP	(covering	both	Part	A	
and	Part	B)	so	that	the	terms	of	existing	options	granted	
can	be	adjusted	in	the	event	of	the	payment	of	a	cash	
dividend	or	dividend	in	specie.	This	provides	that	where	
such	a	dividend	is	paid	the	adjustment	will	be	a	reduction	
in	the	exercise	price	of	an	option	by	the	amount	or	value	
of	the	dividend	provided	that	the	exercise	price	can	
never	be	less	than	zero	and	a	reduction	will	only	be	made	
to	the	exercise	price	of	an	option	that	is	not	then	capable	
of	exercise.

Awards	under	Part	A	of	the	2009	LTIP	were	all	exercised	
in	January	2014.	

A	total	of	6,090,000	options	
are	outstanding	under	Part	
B	of	the	2009	LTIP	(held	by	
Executive	Directors	and	
other	senior	employees)	
and	no	new	awards	will	be	
granted.

The	grants	under	Part	B	of	
the	2009	LTIP	are	options	
which	will	vest	subject	to:

•	 	continued	employment	
to	the	relevant	vesting	
date;

•	 	the	satisfaction	of	the	
underpin	condition	
that	Net	Assets	Per	
Share	are	at	least	£9.00	
at	each	of	the	vesting	
dates.	The	Committee	
determined	to	increase	
the	Net	Asset	Per	Share	
underpin	for	the	vesting	
of	options	from	£5.94	
set	at	the	date	of	grant	
to	£9.00	and	to	require	
that	this	underpin	be	
met	at	each	of	the	
vesting	dates.	

60

61

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  GOVERNANCEBERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  GOVERNANCEGOVERNANCE 
 
 
DIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION REPORT continued

Objective and link 
to strategy

Operation

Maximum opportunity

Performance condition and 
assessment

Deferred balances under the Berkeley Group Holdings plc Bonus Plan (the Bonus Plan)

Provides	long-
term shareholder 
alignment	for	
Executive	Directors	
by	deferring	a	
proportion	of	the	
annual award under 
the	Bonus	Plan.

Participants	are	entitled	to	an	annual	
payment	of	50%	of	their	plan	account	at	the	
end	of	each	financial	year.

All	balances	will	be	deferred	in	shares	
or	notional	shares.	At	the	end	of	the	five	
year	plan	period	100%	of	the	balance	of	
participants’	accounts	will	be	paid.

See	Annual	Bonus	Plan	on	page	71	for	
further	details.

Deferred	awards	under	the	Bonus	
Plan	from	previous	financial	years	will	
be	part	of	the	Company’s	ongoing	
arrangements.

Full	details	of	the	subsisting	awards	
are	set	out	in	previous	year’s	
Committee	Reports.	

See	pages	71	to	73.

NOTES TO ELEMENTS OF PREVIOUS POLICY THAT WILL CONTINUE TO APPLY

RATIONALE BEHIND SELECTION OF PERFORMANCE MEASURES AND TARGETS
The	2009	LTIP	and	2011	LTIP	measures	were	selected	as	the	Committee	believes	they	provide	direct	alignment	with	the	long-term	strategic	
objectives	of	the	Company	and	shareholders.	The	2011	LTIP	plan	aims	to	maximise	returns	within	a	given	level	of	risk,	disciplining	the	business	
to	make	significant	returns	to	shareholders	in	cash	over	a	sustained	period	and	balances	investment	and	returns	to	shareholders.	

2011 LTIP PERFORMANCE TARGETS
The	following	table	sets	out	the	cumulative	distributions,	the	relevant	dates	and	the	consequences	of	failing	to	deliver	these	distributions	by	
these	relevant	dates:

Required date

Cumulative distribution 
(on or before required 
date)

Consequences of failing to make the cumulative distributions on or before 
the required date

30	September	2015

£568.7m

Options	lapse,	no	shares	vest	and	2011	LTIP	terminates	on	1	October	2015.

Awards granted under the Berkeley Group Holdings plc 2011 Long-Term Incentive Plan (2011 LTIP)

30	September	2018

£1,136.1m

The	2011	LTIP	aligns	
Executive	Director	
interests with those 
of	shareholders	
by	focusing	on	
creating	sustainable	
superior returns to 
shareholders	over	a	
10	year	period.

Approved	by	
shareholders at 
the	2011	AGM	and	
amended at the 
2012	AGM.	

Further	details	on	
the	2011	LTIP	are	
set	out	in	the	2011	
Notice	of	AGM	
and	2012	Notice	of	
AGM.

The	2011	LTIP	is	a	ten	year	plan	which	
supports	the	Company’s	long	term	plan	
to	make	a	priority	return	of	approximately	
£1.7	billion	to	shareholders,	representing	
183%	of	the	Net	Assets	per	Share	at	30	April	
2011	(£7.09/share),	through	a	combination	
of	dividends	and	share	buy-backs,	by	
September	2021.

The	plan	aims	to	make	the	returns	to	
shareholders	in	cash	over	a	sustained	period,	
ensuring	the	Group	remains	at	the	right	
size	and	balances	investment	and	returns	to	
shareholders.

If	the	Company	returns	£1.7	billion	to	
shareholders	over	a	ten	year	period	via	a	
series	of	dividend	payments	(£13/share)	and	
share	buy-backs	by	the	dates	referred	to	in	
the	footnote	to	this	table,	participants	will	
be	entitled	to	exercise	options	and	receive	
a	number	of	ordinary	shares	in	the	residual	
capital	of	the	Company	at	the	end	of	the	
ten	year	period	after	the	returns	have	been	
distributed.

The	exercise	price	of	options	granted	under	
the	2011	LTIP	will	be	£13	per	share	less	an	
amount	equal	to	the	value	of	all	dividends	
paid	between	the	date	of	approval	of	the	
2011	LTIP	and	30	September	2021,	provided	
the	exercise	price	cannot	be	less	than	zero.

The	maximum	number	of	shares	
capable	of	being	earned	by	all	
participants	is	19,616,503	shares,	
being	13%	of	the	fully	diluted	share	
capital	of	the	Company	at	the	date	
of	approval	of	the	plan.	

The	awards	for	each	Executive	
Director	are	set	out	below:

Executive 
Director

Number of shares

Performance	will	be	
measured	against	cumulative	
distribution	targets.	

The	notes	to	this	table	set	out	
the	cumulative	distributions	
required	by	the	relevant	
dates	and	the	consequences	
of	failing	to	deliver	these	
distributions.

A W Pidgley

5,000,000

R C Perrins

5,000,000

N G Simpkin

3,250,000

S Ellis

2,250,000

K Whiteman

1,000,000

G J Fry

1,866,503

Including	awards	to	other	senior	
employees	of	the	Company,	options	
over	a	total	of	19,616,503	shares	are	
outstanding.

No	new	awards	will	be	granted	
under	the	2011	LTIP	to	the	current	
Executive	Directors.

Where	the	cumulative	distributions	on	or	before	30	September	2018	is	less	than	
£1,136.1m,	the	following	process	determines	the	number	of	shares	vesting:-

1		The	number	of	shares	capable	of	vesting	is	calculated	on	the	level	of	dividend	

paid	and	capable	of	being	paid	as	at	30	September	2018.	

2		The	exercise	price	of	the	shares	capable	of	vesting	is	set	by	reducing	the	

original	exercise	price	of	£13	by	the	level	of	cumulative	dividend	actually	paid	
on	or	before	30	September	2021.

3		No	shares	will	vest	until	the	end	of	the	2011	LTIP	period	on	30	September	2021	

subject	to	the	participant’s	continued	employment	at	this	date.

30	September	2021

£1,703.6m

The	process	is	the	same	as	above	with	the	relevant	date	being	 
30	September	2021.

£1,703.6	m	paid	in	full	prior	
to	30	September	2021	
(including	£13/share	in	
dividends)

£1,703.6m

In	circumstances	where	£1,703.6	m	of	cumulative	distributions	(including	£13/
share	in	dividends)	are	made	prior	to	30	September	2021	awards	shall	vest	in	full.	

Participants	will	be	able	to	exercise	their	awards	of	options	from	the	date	this	
cumulative	target	is	met	and	may	also	sell	any	shares	necessary	to	pay	their	tax	
liability	on	exercise.

In	respect	of	the	balance	of	their	shares	participants	shall	only	be	able	to	sell	a	
maximum	of	10%	p.a.	of	this	balance	until	30	September	2021	at	which	date	the	
sale	restrictions	shall	lapse.

62

63

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  GOVERNANCEBERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  GOVERNANCEGOVERNANCEDIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION REPORT continued

ILLUSTRATIONS OF APPLICATION OF REMUNERATION POLICY
The	graphs	below	seek	to	demonstrate	how	pay	varies	with	performance	for	the	Executive	Directors	based	on	our	stated	remuneration	 
policy	for	2014/15	financial	year.	Whilst	the	historic	long-term	incentive	plans	do	not	form	part	of	the	future	remuneration	policy	for	2014/15,	
the	Executive	Directors	are	working	towards	the	achievement	of	the	relevant	targets	and	they	have	therefore	been	included	in	the	 
illustrations	below.	

A W Pidgley 
(£000)

3,318

51%

19%

31%

1,013

100%

5,623

60%

22%

18%

R C Perrins
(£000)

2,297

57%

16%
27%

617

100%

3,977

66%

19%

16%

N G Simpkin
(£000)

1,329

56%

14%
30%

403

100%

2,254

66%

16%

18%

Minimum

On-target Maximum

Minimum

On-target Maximum

Minimum

On-target Maximum

G J Fry
(£000)

424

100%

1,801

60%

17%

23%

1,112

48%

14%
38%

K Whiteman 
(£000)

884

39%

16%

45%

396

100%

1,372

50%

21%

29%

S Ellis
(£000)

399
100%

1,890

60%

19%

21%

1,144

50%

15%
35%

Minimum

On-target Maximum

Minimum

On-target Maximum

Minimum

On-target Maximum

Key: 

Fixed

Annual variable

Multiple reporting period

Assumptions	used	in	determining	the	level	of	pay-out	under	given	scenarios	are	as	follows:	

Element

Fixed Elements

Minimum

On-target

Maximum

Fixed	elements	do	not	vary	with	performance	and	comprise:

•	 2014/15	base	salary

•	 Estimated	benefits	for	2014/15

•	 Pension	(or	cash	in	lieu	of)	contributions.

Annual Variable Element

Bonus Plan

0%

Annual	cash	element	where	
performance	measures	relate	to	
one	financial	year

Multiple Reporting Period Elements

Bonus Plan

Deferred	element	where	
performance	measures	relate	to	
more	than	one	financial	year

2011 LTIP

2009 LTIP Part B

0%

0%

0%

25%	of	maximum	award	1,2

50%	maximum	award	1

25%	of	maximum	award	1,2

50%	maximum	award	1

50%	vesting	3

50%	vesting	4

100%	vesting	3

100%	vesting	4

Notes

1.	 The	total	under	all	elements	of	the	Bonus	Plan	is	a	maximum	of	175%-300%	of	salary	p.a.	dependent	upon	Executive	Director.

2.	 	A	level	of	50%	vesting	for	‘on-target’	performance	reflects	the	mid-point	of	the	performance	range	under	the	Bonus	Plan	Group	

performance	matrix	and	PBT	Divisional	targets.	See	page	78	for	more	details.

3.	 	The	2011	LTIP	is	a	one-off	award	granted	over	a	10	year	period	therefore	we	have	used	one	tenth	of	the	IFRS	2	fair	value	of	the	options	at	

the	date	of	grant	as	the	Maximum	and	50%	of	this	value	for	On-Target.	

4.	 	The	2009	LTIP	Part	B	is	a	one-off	award	which	vests	over	6	and	7	years	(50%	in	2015	and	50%	in	2016).	Therefore	we	have	used	one	sixth	and	

one	seventh	of	IFRS	2	fair	values	of	the	options	at	the	date	of	grant	as	the	Maximum	and	50%	of	this	value	for	On-Target.	

5.	 In	accordance	with	the	Regulations,	no	allowance	has	been	made	for	share	price	appreciation.

FUTURE POLICY – NON-EXECUTIVE DIRECTORS
The	table	below	sets	out	the	key	elements	of	the	policy	for	Non-executive	Directors:

Objective and link to 
strategy

Operation

Maximum

Performance 
conditions and 
assessment

To	attract	Non-
executive	Directors	
with	the	requisite	
skills	and	experience	
to	contribute	to	
the	strategy	of	
the	Company	
and	to	review	its	
implementation.

Current	fee	levels	are	set	out	in	the	
statement	of	implementation	of	
remuneration	policy	on	page	79.

N/A

In	general	fee	rises	will	be	limited	
to	the	level	provided	to	employees	
of	the	Company	as	a	whole.

In	setting	fees,	the	Board	looks	
at	the	upper	quartile	fee	levels	of	
companies	of	broadly	similar	size	
and	complexity,	in	particular	those	
companies	within	the	comparator	
group	and	those	in	the	FTSE	250.	

On	an	annual	basis	the	Board	will	
review	the	comparator	groups	to	
ensure	they	appropriately	reflect	
the	Company’s	size,	operations	
and	business	complexities.

All	Non-executive	Directors	have	specific	terms	of	
engagement	and	their	remuneration	is	determined	
by	the	Board	within	the	limits	set	by	the	Articles	of	
Association.

Each	Non-executive	Director	receives	a	fee	which	
relates	to	membership	of	the	Board	and	additional	
fees	are	paid	for	Committee	Chairmanship.	

In	exceptional	circumstances,	fees	may	also	be	paid	
for	additional	time	spent	on	the	Company’s	business	
outside	of	the	normal	duties.

The	Board	reviews	the	fees	of	the	Non-executive	
Directors	annually	taking	into	account	the	following	
factors:

•	 	the	workload	and	level	of	responsibility	of	the	
Non-executive	Directors	under	the	changing	
corporate	governance	expectations	of	
shareholders	and	their	representative	bodies;	

•	 	the	current	market	rate	for	fees	for	Non-executive	
Directors	based	on	the	comparators	used	for	the	
Executive	Directors.

Changes	are	effective	from	1	May	each	year.

The	Company	has	a	shareholding	requirement	for	
Non-executive	Directors,	linked	to	net	fee	they	
receive	from	the	Company.	This	is	equal	to	100%	of	
net	fees.	This	should	be	achieved	within	three	years	
of	appointment	for	Non-executive	Directors.

Non-executive	Directors	cannot	participate	in	any	of	the	Company’s	share	incentive	plans	or	performance	based	plans	and	are	not	eligible	to	
join	the	Company’s	pension	scheme.

APPROACH TO RECRUITMENT REMUNERATION
The	Committee’s	approach	to	recruitment	remuneration	is	to	pay	no	more	than	is	necessary	to	attract	candidates	of	the	appropriate	calibre	
and	experience	needed	for	the	role.	The	remuneration	package	for	any	new	recruit	would	be	assessed	following	the	same	principles	as	for	the	
current	Executive	Directors.

The	Committee	is	mindful	that	it	wishes	to	avoid	paying	more	than	it	considers	necessary	to	secure	the	preferred	candidate	and	is	aware	of	
guidelines	and	shareholder	sentiment	regarding	one-off	or	enhanced	short	or	long-term	incentive	payments	made	on	recruitment	and	the	
appropriateness	of	any	performance	conditions	associated	with	an	award.

64

65

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  GOVERNANCEBERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  GOVERNANCEGOVERNANCE  
 
DIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION REPORT continued

Where	an	existing	employee	is	promoted	to	the	Board,	the	policy	would	apply	from	the	date	of	promotion	but	there	would	be	no	
retrospective	application	of	the	policy	in	relation	to	subsisting	incentive	awards	or	remuneration	arrangements.	Accordingly,	prevailing	
elements	of	the	remuneration	package	for	an	existing	employee	would	be	honoured	and	form	part	of	the	ongoing	remuneration	of	the	
employee.	These	would	be	disclosed	to	shareholders	in	the	following	year’s	Annual	Report	on	Remuneration.	

SERVICE CONTRACTS
Details	of	the	service	contracts	or	letters	of	appointment	for	the	Directors	are	as	follows:

The	table	below	summarises	our	key	policies	with	respect	to	recruitment	remuneration:

Executive Directors

Date of contract

Expiry date

Notice period by Company or 
Director

Element

Policy

Base salary and benefits

Pension

Annual bonus

Long-Term incentives

The	salary	level	will	be	set	taking	into	account	the	responsibilities	of	the	individual,	experience	and	
the	salaries	paid	to	similar	roles	in	comparable	companies.	The	Committee	will	apply	the	policy	set	
out	on	salaries	for	the	current	Executive	Directors	in	the	remuneration	policy	table.

The	Executive	Director	shall	be	eligible	to	receive	benefits	in	line	with	Berkeley’s	benefits	policy	as	
set	out	in	the	remuneration	policy	table.

The	Executive	Director	will	be	entitled	to	receive	contributions	into	a	pension	plan	or	alternatively	
to	receive	a	supplement	in	lieu	of	pension	contributions	in	line	with	Berkeley’s	pension	policy	as	set	
out	in	the	remuneration	policy	table.

The	Executive	Director	will	be	eligible	to	participate	in	the	Bonus	Plan	as	set	out	in	the	
remuneration	policy	table.

The	maximum	potential	opportunity	under	this	Plan	is	300%	of	salary.

On	recruitment,	a	new	Executive	Director	will	be	eligible	to	participate	in	the	2011	LTIP	set	out	in	
the	“Elements	of	previous	policy	that	will	continue	to	apply”	section,	provided	awards	are	available	
under	the	Plan	and	the	total	number	of	awards	granted	to	all	participants	does	not	exceed	
19,616,503	shares	under	subsisting	options	as	agreed	with	shareholders	at	the	2011	AGM.

Maximum Level of Variable 
Remuneration

300%	of	salary	under	the	Bonus	Plan	and	any	available	awards	under	the	2011	LTIP	provided	awards	
are	available	under	the	Plan	and	the	total	number	of	awards	granted	to	all	participants	does	not	
exceed	19,616,503	shares	under	subsisting	options.

Share buy-outs

Relocation policies

The	Committee’s	policy	is	not	to	provide	buy-outs	as	a	matter	of	course.	However,	should	the	
Committee	determine	that	the	individual	circumstances	of	recruitment	justified	the	provision	of	
a	buy-out,	the	value	of	any	incentives	that	will	be	forfeited	on	cessation	of	a	director’s	previous	
employment	will	be	calculated	taking	into	account	the	following:

•	 	the	proportion	of	the	performance	period	completed	on	the	date	of	the	director’s	cessation	of	

employment;

•	 	the	performance	conditions	attached	to	the	vesting	of	these	incentives	and	the	likelihood	of	

them	being	satisfied;	

•	 any	other	terms	and	condition	having	a	material	effect	on	their	value	(‘lapsed	value’);

The	Committee	may	then	grant	up	to	the	equivalent	value	as	the	lapsed	value,	where	possible,	
under	the	Company’s	incentive	plans.	To	the	extent	that	it	was	not	possible	or	practical	to	provide	
the	buyout	within	the	terms	of	the	Company’s	existing	incentive	plans,	a	bespoke	arrangement	
would	be	used.

Where	the	new	Executive	Director	is	relocated	from	one	work-base	to	another,	the	Company	may	
provide	one-off/on-going	as	part	of	the	Director’s	relocation	benefits	compensation	to	reflect	the	
cost	of	relocation	for	the	Executive	in	cases	where	they	are	expected	to	spend	significant	time	
away	from	their	country	of	domicile.

The	level	of	the	relocation	package	will	be	assessed	on	a	case	by	case	basis	but	will	take	into	
consideration	any	cost	of	living	differences/housing	allowance/schooling.

A	W	Pidgley

24	June	1994

R	C	Perrins

15	July	2002

N	G	Simpkin

11	September	2002

G	J	Fry

27	June	1996

K	Whiteman

15	January	1996

S	Ellis

5	May	2004

Rolling	service	contract	with	no	
fixed	expiry	date

12	months

Rolling	service	contract	with	no	
fixed	expiry	date

12	months

Rolling	service	contract	with	no	
fixed	expiry	date

12	months

Rolling	service	contract	with	no	
fixed	expiry	date

12	months

Rolling	service	contract	with	no	
fixed	expiry	date

12	months

Rolling	service	contract	with	no	
fixed	expiry	date

12	months

Non-executives

Letter of appointment

Expiry date

Notice period by Company or 
Director

J	Armitt

D	Howell

A	Nimmo

G	Barker

V	Wadley

A	Li

A	Myers

1	October	2007

Renewable	annually	on	1	May

24	February	2004

Renewable	annually	on	1	May

5	September	2011

Renewable	annually	on	1	May

3	January	2012

3	January	2012

Renewable	annually	on	1	May

Renewable	annually	on	1	May

2	September	2013

Renewable	annually	on	1	May

6	December	2013

Renewable	annually	on	1	May

n/a

n/a

n/a

n/a

n/a

n/a

n/a

All	service	contracts	and	letters	of	appointments	are	available	for	viewing	at	the	Company’s	registered	office.	

The	Company’s	practice	is	to	appoint	the	Non-executive	Directors	under	letters	of	appointment,	which	are	renewable	annually	on	1	May.	They	
are	subject	to	the	provisions	of	the	Articles	of	Association	dealing	with	appointment	and	rotation	every	three	years,	however	in	accordance	
with	the	UK	Corporate	Governance	code	are	subject	to	annual	re-election.

When	setting	notice	periods	for	Executive	Directors,	the	Committee	has	regard	for	market	practice	and	corporate	governance	best	practice.	
Notice	periods	will	not	be	greater	than	12	months.	

PAYMENTS FOR LOSS OF OFFICE 
When	determining	any	loss	of	office	payment	for	a	departing	Director	the	Committee	will	always	seek	to	minimise	the	cost	to	the	Company	
whilst	complying	with	the	contractual	terms	and	seeking	to	reflect	the	circumstances	in	place	at	the	time.	The	Committee	reserves	the	right	to	
make	additional	payments	where	such	payments	are	made	in	good	faith	in	discharge	of	an	existing	legal	obligation	(or	by	way	of	damages	for	
breach	of	such	an	obligation);	or	by	way	of	settlement	or	compromise	of	any	claim	arising	in	connection	with	the	termination	of	an	Executive	
Director’s	office	or	employment.

66

67

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  GOVERNANCEBERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  GOVERNANCEGOVERNANCEDIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION REPORT continued

The	table	below	sets	out	the	Company’s	termination	policy	in	respect	of	Executive	Director	contracts	for	each	element	of	total	remuneration.	
For	each	element	the	table	also	sets	out	the	boundaries	of	Committee	discretion	to	apply	flexibility	to	the	default	position.

Element

Approach

Application of Committee discretion

Base salary and benefits

In	the	event	of	termination	by	the	Company,	there	will	be	no	
compensation	for	loss	of	office	due	to	misconduct	or	normal	resignation.

The	Committee	has	discretion	to	make	a	lump	sum	
payment	in	lieu.

In	other	circumstances,	Executive	Directors	may	be	entitled	to	receive	
compensation	for	loss	of	office	which	will	be	a	maximum	of	twelve	months	
salary.	

Such	payments	will	be	equivalent	to	the	monthly	salary	and	benefits	that	
the	executive	would	have	received	if	still	in	employment	with	the	
Company.	Executive	Directors	will	be	expected	to	mitigate	their	loss	within	
a	twelve	month	period	of	their	departure	from	the	Company.

Pension 

Pension	contributions	or	payments	in	lieu	of	pension	contribution	will	be	
made	during	the	notice	period.	No	additional	payments	will	be	made	in	
respect	of	pension	contributions	for	loss	of	office.

The	Committee	has	discretion	to	make	a	lump	sum	
payment	in	lieu.

Annual bonus

Cessation of employment

The	treatment	of	the	Bonus	
Plan	is	governed	by	the	rules	
of	the	plan.	

If	a	participant	ceases	to	be	employed	by	a	Group	Company	for	any	
reason	an	award	that	has	not	vested	shall	lapse	unless	the	Committee	in	its	
absolute	discretion	determines	otherwise	for	‘good	leaver’	reasons	
(including,	but	not	limited	to,	injury,	disability,	ill	health,	retirement,	
redundancy	or	transfer	of	the	business).

If	the	Committee,	determines	that	deferred	awards	held	in	a	participants	
plan	account	shall	not	lapse	on	cessation	of	employment,	all	deferred	
awards	held	in	the	participant’s	plan	account	shall	vest	immediately	and	
the	Committee	shall	determine:

(a)		whether	the	measurement	date	for	that	plan	year	is	brought	forward	to	

the	date	of	cessation	or	remains	at	the	end	of	the	plan	year;	

(b)		whether	a	reduction	is	applied	to	the	payment	to	take	account	the	

proportion	of	the	plan	year	elapsed	and	the	contribution	to	the	Group.

If	the	Committee	determines	that	the	measurement	date	is	the	date	of	
cessation,	the	Committee	shall	pro-rate	the	performance	conditions	to	the	
date	of	cessation.

Change of control

The	Committee	has	the	discretion	to	determine	that	
an	Executive	Director	is	a	good	leaver.	

The	Committee	retains	discretion	to	set	the	
measurement	date	for	the	purposes	of	determining	
performance	measurement	and	whether	to	pro-rate	
the	contribution	for	that	plan	year.	

It	should	be	noted	that	it	is	the	Committee’s	policy	
only	to	apply	such	discretions	if	the	circumstances	at	
the	time	are,	in	its	opinion,	sufficiently	exceptional,	
and	to	provide	a	full	explanation	to	shareholders	
where	discretion	is	exercised.

On	a	change	of	control,	all	deferred	awards	held	in	a	participant’s	plan	
account	shall	vest	immediately	and	the	Committee	shall	determine:

The	Committee	retains	discretion	to	pro-rate	the	
contribution	for	that	plan	year.	

(a)	that	the	measurement	date	is	the	date	of	the	change	of	control;	

(b)		whether	a	reduction	is	applied	to	the	payment	to	take	account	the	

proportion	of	the	plan	year	elapsed	and	the	participant’s	contribution	to	
the	Group.	

The	Committee	shall	pro-rate	the	performance	conditions	to	the	
measurement	date.	

In	the	event	of	an	internal	reorganisation,	the	Committee	may	determine	
that	awards	are	replaced	by	equivalent	awards.	

It	is	the	Committee’s	policy	in	normal	circumstances	
to	pro-rate	to	time;	however,	in	exceptional	
circumstances	where	the	nature	of	the	transaction	
produces	exceptional	value	for	shareholders	and	
provided	the	performance	targets	are	met	the	
Committee	will	consider	whether	pro-rating	is	
equitable.

2009 LTIP Part B

Cessation of employment

The	treatment	of	2009	LTIP	
Part	B	awards	is	governed	by	
the	rules	of	the	plan,	as	
approved	by	shareholders	at	
the	2009	EGM	and	the	
amendment	approved	at	the	
2011	AGM.

If	a	participant	ceases	to	be	employed	by	a	Group	Company	for	any	
reason	other	than	death,	injury,	ill-health,	disability,	retirement,	the	
employing	Company	ceasing	to	be	a	Group	Company	or	a	transfer	of	the	
business	or	any	other	reason	determined	by	the	Committee,	the	
participant’s	option	shall	lapse.

For	‘good	leaver’	reasons	noted	above,	the	number	of	shares	under	
option	capable	of	vesting	will	be	calculated	by	pro-rating	to	the	amount	of	
the	relevant	vesting	period	completed	on	the	date	of	cessation	of	
employment.	Awards	will	only	vest	at	the	end	of	the	relevant	vesting	
period	subject	to	the	satisfaction	of	the	performance	condition.

The	exercise	price	shall	be	adjusted	for	the	payment	of	any	cash	dividend	
or	dividend	in	specie	in	accordance	with	the	plan	rules.

The	Committee	has	the	discretion	to	determine	that	
an	Executive	Director	is	a	good	leaver.	

The	Committee	will	only	use	its	general	discretion	to	
determine	that	an	Executive	Director	is	a	good	
leaver	in	exceptional	circumstances	and	will	provide	
a	full	explanation	to	shareholders,	if	possible	in	
advance,	of	the	basis	for	its	determination.

Element

Approach

Application of Committee discretion

2009 LTIP Part B continued

Change of control

On	a	change	of	control	of	the	Company	or	Court	sanction	of	a	scheme	of	
arrangement,	all	options	shall	be	exercisable.	The	number	of	shares	under	
option	exercisable	on	a	change	of	control	will	be	determined	by	pro-rating	
the	time	elapsed	from	the	date	of	grant	to	the	date	of	the	change	of	
control	compared	to	the	original	vesting	period	and	subject	to	the	
satisfaction	(as	determined	by	the	Committee	in	its	absolute	discretion)	of	
the	performance	condition	at	the	date	of	the	change	of	control.	

The	exercise	price	shall	be	adjusted	for	the	payment	of	any	cash	dividend	
or	dividend	in	specie	to	the	date	of	the	relevant	transaction	in	accordance	
with	the	plan	rules.

In	the	event	of	an	internal	reorganisation,	options	shall	not	vest	unless	the	
Board	consents	and	the	Board	may	determine	that	options	are	exchanged	
for	an	option	over	a	successor	company’s	shares.

The	Committee	have	the	discretion	to	determine	
how	the	performance	condition	taken	into	account	
on	a	change	of	control.	The	Board	will	only	use	this	
discretion	in	exceptional	circumstances	and	will	
provide	a	full	explanation	to	shareholders,	if	possible	
in	advance,	of	the	basis	for	its	determination.

2011 LTIP

Cessation of employment

The	treatment	of	2011	LTIP	
awards	is	governed	by	the	
rules	of	the	plan,	as	approved	
by	shareholders	at	the	2011	
AGM	Meeting	and	the	
amendment	approved	at	the	
2012	AGM.

If	a	participant	ceases	to	be	employed	by	a	Group	Company	for	any	
reason	other	than	death,	injury,	ill-health,	disability,	redundancy,	retirement,	
the	employing	Company	ceasing	to	be	a	Group	Company	or	a	transfer	of	
the	business	or	any	other	reason	determined	by	the	Committee,	the	
participant’s	option	shall	lapse.

For	‘good	leaver’	reasons	noted	above,	the	Committee	will	determine	the	
number	of	shares	capable	of	vesting	taking	into	account	dividends	paid	
per	share	and	share	buy-backs	as	at	the	termination	date	and	the	number	
of	shares	under	option	held	by	the	participant.

The	exercise	price	shall	be	adjusted	for	any	dividends	paid	in	accordance	
with	the	plan	rules.

Change of control

The	Committee	has	the	discretion	to	determine	that	
an	Executive	Director	is	a	good	leaver.	

The	Committee	will	only	use	its	general	discretion	to	
determine	that	an	Executive	Director	is	a	good	
leaver	in	exceptional	circumstances	and	will	provide	
a	full	explanation	to	shareholders,	if	possible	in	
advance,	of	the	basis	for	its	determination.

An	option	will	become	exercisable	in	full	immediately	prior	to	a	change	of	
control	of	the	Company,	Court	sanction	of	a	scheme	of	arrangement	or	the	
disposal	of	all,	or	substantially	all,	of	the	assets	of	the	Company	and	its	
subsidiaries.	

The	exercise	price	shall	be	adjusted	for	any	dividends	made	to	the	date	of	
the	relevant	transaction	in	accordance	with	the	plan	rules.

In	the	event	of	an	internal	reorganisation,	options	shall	not	vest	unless	the	
Committee	consents	and	the	Committee	may	determine	that	options	are	
exchanged	for	an	option	over	a	successor	company’s	shares.

Consideration	shall	be	given	by	the	Committee,	in	
consultation	with	the	participants,	as	to	whether	the	
type	or	timing	of	any	consideration	receivable	by	
shareholders	should	affect	either	the	timing	of	the	
exercise	of	options	and/or	alter	the	calculation	of	
the	exercise	price	such	that	the	participants	do	not	
receive	a	greater	or	lesser	benefit	from	the	
transaction	than	the	shareholders	beyond	the	ability	
to	exercise	their	options.

Other contractual 
obligations

No	contractual	provision	agreed	prior	to	27th	June	2012	that	could	impact	
quantum	of	the	payment.

None.	

CONSIDERATION OF EMPLOYMENT CONDITIONS ELSEWHERE IN THE COMPANY 
In	making	annual	pay	decisions	the	Committee	also	gives	consideration	to	pay	and	employment	conditions	in	the	rest	of	the	Group,	including	
any	base	salary	increases	awarded.	The	Committee	is	provided	with	data	on	the	remuneration	structure	for	management	level	tiers	below	the	
Executive	Directors,	and	uses	this	information	to	ensure	consistency	of	approach	throughout	the	Company.	No	comparison	metrics	were	used.

Although	the	Committee	takes	into	account	the	pay	and	conditions	of	other	employees,	the	Company	did	not	consult	with	employees	when	
drawing	up	the	policy	report.

CONSIDERATION OF SHAREHOLDER VIEWS 
The	Committee	takes	the	views	of	the	shareholders	seriously	and	these	views	are	taken	into	account	in	shaping	remuneration	policy	and	
practice.	Shareholder	views	are	considered	when	evaluating	and	setting	remuneration	strategy	and	the	Committee	commits	to	consulting	with	
key	shareholders	prior	to	any	significant	changes	to	its	remuneration	policy.	

68

69

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  GOVERNANCEBERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  GOVERNANCEGOVERNANCEDIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION REPORT continued

ANNUAL REPORT ON REMUNERATION

This	section	of	the	remuneration	report	contains	details	of	how	the	Company’s	2013/14	remuneration	policy	for	Directors	was	implemented	
during	the	financial	year	ending	on	30	April	2014.	An	advisory	resolution	to	approve	this	report	will	be	put	to	shareholders	at	the	AGM.

SINGLE TOTAL FIGURE OF REMUNERATION (AUDITED)
The	table	below	sets	out	the	single	total	figure	of	remuneration	and	breakdown	for	each	Executive	Director	paid	in	the	2013/14	financial	year.	
Comparative	figures	for	2012/13	have	also	been	provided.	Figures	provided	have	been	calculated	in	accordance	with	the	Regulations.

Salary

Benefits

Annual bonus

2014
£’000

2013
£’000

2014
£’000

2013
£’000

2014
£’000

2013
£’000

Multi-year 
performance 
incentive

2014
£’000

2013
£’000

Pensions

Total

2014
£’000

2013
£’000

800

484

321

334

314

314

780

470

312

325

305

305

47

32

23

28

24

27

39

31

21

31

21

26

1,200

1,170

1,574

1,516

136

133

726

353

292

275

275

705

343

284

200

267

947

424

359

294

333

912

380

329

302

302

82

48

50

47

47

80

47

49

46

46

2014
£’000

3,757

2,271

2013
£’000

3,638

2,198

1,169

1,103

1,063

1,018

954

996

874

946

2,567

2,497

181

169

3,121

2,969

3,931

3,741

410

401

10,210

9,777

Executive 
Director

A	W	Pidgley

R	C	Perrins

N	G	Simpkin

G	J	Fry

K	Whiteman

S	Ellis

Notes

1.	 2013/14	and	2012/13	multiyear	performance	incentive	–	the	amounts	relate	to	awards	that	were	released	under	the	Annual	Bonus	Plan.	

2.	 Benefits	include	a	fully	expensed	company	car	or	cash	allowance	alternative	and	medical	insurance.	

The	table	below	sets	out	the	single	total	figure	of	remuneration	and	breakdown	for	each	Non-executive	Director.	Figures	provided	have	been	
calculated	in	accordance	with	the	Regulations.

Basic fees

Additional fees (4)

Total fees

Non-executive Director

2014
£’000

2013
£’000

J	Armitt

D	Howell	

A	Coppin	(1)

A	Nimmo

G	Barker

V	Wadley

A	Li	(2)

A	Myers	(3)

Notes

103

56.5

19

56.5

56.5

56.5

38

23

409

93

55

55

55

55

55

–

–

368

2014
£’000

–

12.5

–

–

12.5

–

–

–

25

2013
£’000

–

12.5

12.5

–

–

–

–

–

25

2014
£’000

103

69

19

56.5

69

56.5

38

23

434

2013
£’000

93

67.5

67.5

55

55

55

N/A

N/A

393

1.	 Resigned	from	the	Board	on	2	September	2013.

2.	 Appointed	to	the	Board	on	2	September	2013.

3.	 Appointed	to	the	Board	on	6	December	2013.

4.	 Additional	fees	represent	fees	paid	for	the	role	of	Committee	Chairmanship.	

Non-executive	Directors	do	not	participate	in	any	of	the	Company’s	incentive	arrangements	nor	do	they	receive	any	benefits.

ADDITIONAL DETAILS IN RESPECT OF SINGLE TOTAL FIGURE TABLE (AUDITED)
The	main	elements	of	the	remuneration	outcomes	for	2013/14	are	set	out	below.	

TAXABLE BENEFITS
Taxable	benefits	comprise	a	fully	expensed	company	car	or	cash	allowance	alternative	and	medical	insurance.

ANNUAL BONUS
In	respect	of	the	year	under	review,	the	Executive	Directors’	performance	was	carefully	reviewed	by	the	Committee	and	performance	against	
the	Bonus	Plan	targets	is	summarised	below:	

Executive Director

A	W	Pidgley

R	C	Perrins

N	G	Simpkin

G	J	Fry

K	Whiteman

S	Ellis

Maximum Annual 
Bonus

Weighting – % of 
maximum paid for 
Group Performance

Weighting – % of 
maximum paid for 
Divisional Performance

Annual Bonus 
Contribution to Plan 
Account for 2013/14 
£’000

Annual Bonus 
Contribution to Plan 
Account for 2013/14  
% of maximum 

300%

300%

220%

175%

175%

175%

100%

100%

100%

50%

50%

50%

0%

0%

0%

50%

50%

50%

2,400

1,452

706

585

550

550

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

Assessment of Group performance condition  
The	matrix	of	targets	against	which	performance	has	been	assessed	for	the	current	year	are	set	out	below:

Land Bank Growth

<1%

0.0%

Bonus	Plan	
Deduction

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

Performance Requirement Matrix

<15.0%

15.0%

16.0%

17.0%

18.0%

19.0%

20.0%

0%

50%

60%

70%

80%

90%

100%

y
t
i
u
q
E
n
o
n
r
u
t
e
R

Notes

1%

50.0%

2%

62.5%

3%

75.0%

4%

87.5%

5%

100.0%

0%

25%

30%

35%

40%

45%

50%

0%

31%

38%

44%

50%

56%

63%

0%

38%

45%

53%

60%

68%

75%

0%

44%

53%

61%

70%

79%

88%

0%

50%

60%

70%

80%

90%

100%

1.	 	The	matrix	shows	the	percentage	of	each	of	the	performance	requirements	for	a	given	level	of	performance	and	the	corresponding	percentage	of	the	targeted	

maximum	annual	bonus	potential	that	could	be	earned	for	2013/14.

2.	 Straight	line	bonus	vesting	between	points.

3.	 Return	on	Equity	(ROE)	is	defined	as	profit	before	tax	divided	by	average	shareholders’	funds.

4.	 Land	Bank	Growth	is	defined	as	the	annual	percentage	increase	in	the	development	margin	in	the	land	bank.	

70

71

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  GOVERNANCEBERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  GOVERNANCEGOVERNANCE 
 
 
DIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION REPORT continued

Actual	performance	against	the	maximum	targets	for	2013/14	are	set	out	below,	along	with	the	targets	and	actual	performance	for	the	
preceding	three	years	of	the	five	year	plan:	

The	deferred	balances	on	each	Director’s	plan	account	are	set	out	below.

Return on Equity

Land Bank Growth

Bonus Plan year

Maximum Target

2013/14

2012/13

2011/12

2010/11

20.0%

18.5%

16.5%

13.5%

Actual

27.5%

22.4%

21.2%

15.3%

Maximum Target

5.0%

10.0%

8.0%

10.0%

Actual

5.7%

10.5%

12.0%

13.1%

For	the	2013/14	financial	year,	the	annual	Bonus	Plan	contribution	based	on	performance	against	the	Group	performance	targets	matrix	
equated	to	100%	of	the	maximum	annual	bonus	subject	to	this	condition.	

Assessment of Divisional PBT performance condition

Division

St	George

Berkeley	Homes	Urban	
Renaissance

St	James	Group

Percentage of bonus 
element paid for threshold 
performance

Percentage of bonus 
element paid for maximum 
performance

Level of actual performance 
as a percentage of the 
maximum  performance 
target

Percentage of bonus 
element earned following 
assessment against the 
performance target

0%

0%

0%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

The	Divisional	PBT	targets	are	set	at	the	beginning	of	the	financial	year	at	a	level	which	is	challenging	taking	into	account	the	potential	level	of	
bonus	payments,	the	market,	the	developments	under	management	and	other	relevant	issues.	Disclosure	of	PBT	targets	are	considered	to	be	
commercially	sensitive	as	the	disclosure	of	such	details	could	be	detrimental	to	the	Company’s	future	strategic	plans.

For	the	2013/14	financial	year,	the	annual	Bonus	Plan	contribution	based	on	performance	against	the	Divisional	PBT	targets	equated	to	100%	
of	maximum	annual	bonus	subject	to	this	condition.

The	Committee	exercised	no	discretion	in	determining	incentive	outcomes	for	the	year	ended	30	April	2014.

Bonus earned but deferred under the Bonus Plan 
Under	the	Bonus	Plan,	the	earned	bonus	for	the	year	is	added	to	each	individual	Director’s	plan	account.	50%	of	the	balance	on	the	plan	
account	at	the	end	of	the	financial	year	is	released	and	50%	deferred.	See	remuneration	policy	table	on	page	59	for	details	on	the	operation	of	
the	Bonus	Plan.	

c. 
Contribution 
into plan 
account for 
the financial 
year 2013/14

d. Plan account 
balance 
following 
contribution 
for financial 
year 2013/14

e. Amount 
released 
following 
contribution 
for financial 
year 2013/14

f. Amount 
released 
- annual 
bonus (50% 
of column c)

g. Amount 
released 
- multiyear 
(column e 
less column 
f)

b. Plan 
account 
brought 
forward (1)

h. Plan 
account 
carried 
forward

i. Plan 
account 
carried 
forward (2)

£’000

3,147

1,895

847

718

588

666

£’000

2,400

1,452

706

585

550

550

£’000

5,547

3,347

1,553

1,303

1,138

1,216

£’000

2,774

1,673

777

651

569

608

£’000

1,200

£’000

1,574

726

353

292

275

275

947

424

359

294

333

£’000

2,774

1,673

777

651

569

608

Shares

120,912

72,948

33,853

28,398

24,801

26,505

a. Plan 
account 
brought 
forward

Shares

128,835

77,563

34,669

29,406

24,084

27,284

321,841

7,861

6,243

14,104

7,052

3,121

3,931

7,052

307,417

Executive 
Director

A	W	Pidgley

R	C	Perrins

N	G	Simpkin

G	J	Fry

K	Whiteman

S	Ellis

Notes

1.	 Converted	at	a	share	price	of	£22.94	at	30	April	2014	plus	£0.59	dividend	paid	27	September	2013	plus	£0.90	dividend	paid	17	January	2014.

2.	 Converted	at	a	share	price	of	£22.94	at	30	April	2014.

There	is	a	risk	adjustment	mechanism	built	into	the	operation	of	the	Bonus	Plan.	If	the	threshold	levels	of	ROE,	Land	Bank	Growth	or	Divisional	
PBT	are	not	met	for	any	financial	year	during	the	five	years	of	operation	of	the	Bonus	Plan	part	of	a	participants	plan	account	will	be	forfeited.	

LONG-TERM INCENTIVES
No	LTIPs	with	performance	conditions	related	to	the	2013/14	financial	year	vested	during	the	year.	

TOTAL PENSION ENTITLEMENTS (AUDITED)
No	Executive	Directors	participate	in	any	defined	benefit	arrangements.	For	reference,	Nick	Simpkin	and	Sean	Ellis	are	members	of	a	defined	
contribution	scheme,	and	Greg	Fry	was	until	June	2013.	They	received	contributions	equal	to	15%	of	salary.	

No	amounts	were	paid	into	pension	arrangements	in	respect	of	Tony	Pidgley,	Rob	Perrins	and	Karl	Whiteman	during	the	year	ended	 
30	April	2014,	who	instead	received	payments	in	lieu	of	a	pension	contribution	from	the	Company	during	the	year	(2013/14:	percentages	
of	salary	17%,	17%	and	15%	respectively).	Greg	Fry	received	payments	in	lieu	of	a	pension	contribution	from	the	Company	from	June	2013	
onwards	at	15%	of	salary.

SCHEME INTERESTS AWARDED IN 2013/14 FINANCIAL YEAR (AUDITED)
No	awards	were	made	to	the	Executive	Directors	in	the	year	under	the	incentive	arrangements.	

PAYMENTS TO PAST DIRECTORS (AUDITED)
No	payments	to	past	Directors	were	made	during	the	year.

PAYMENTS FOR LOSS OF OFFICE (AUDITED)
No	payments	for	loss	of	office	were	made	during	the	year.

72

73

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  GOVERNANCEBERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  GOVERNANCEGOVERNANCEDIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION REPORT continued

DIRECTORS’ SHAREHOLDING AND SHARE INTERESTS (AUDITED)
The	Company	has	a	shareholding	requirement	for	both	Executive	and	Non-executive	Directors,	linked	to	base	salary	or	net	fee	they	receive	
from	the	Company.	In	the	case	of	the	Group	Chairman	this	is	400%	of	base	salary,	for	other	Executive	Directors	200%	of	base	salary	and	for	the	
Non-executive	Directors	100%	of	net	fees.	This	should	be	achieved	within	five	years	of	appointment	for	Executive	Directors	and	three	years	of	
appointment	for	Non-executive	Directors.

Using	the	Company’s	closing	share	price	of	£22.94	on	30	April	2014,	compliance	with	these	requirements	was	as	follows:	

Director

Executive Director

A	W	Pidgley

R	C	Perrins

N	G	Simpkin

G	J	Fry

K	Whiteman

S	Ellis

Non-executive Director

J	Armitt

D	Howell

A	Nimmo

G	Barker

V	Wadley

A	Li

A	Myers

Obligation  
(% base salary/NED net fees)

% base salary/NED net fees at  
30 April 2014

Achievement at 30 April 2014

400%

200%

200%

200%

200%

200%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

19,445%

7,344%

193%

7,972%

262%

89%

350%

495%

140%

447%

455%

700%

46%

√

√

x

√

√

x

√

√

√

√

√

√

x

The	table	below	summarises	the	Directors’	interests	in	shares:

Director

Executive Director

A	W	Pidgley

R	C	Perrins

N	G	Simpkin

G	J	Fry

K	Whiteman

S	Ellis

Non-executive Director

J	Armitt

D	Howell

A	Nimmo

G	Barker

V	Wadley

A	Li

A	Myers

Notes

Scheme interests – Options and awards over shares

Option interests subject to conditions2

Shares1

2009 LTIP Part B

2011 LTIP

Total Interests held 

6,781,124

1,549,405

27,000

1,160,746

35,815

12,212

9,112

8,631

2,000

7,800

6,500

10,000

650

1,500,000

750,000

250,000

500,000

250,000

175,000

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

5,000,000

5,000,000

3,250,000

1,866,503

1,000,000

2,250,000

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

6,500,000

5,750,000

3,500,000

2,366,503

1,250,000

2,425,000

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

1.	 Beneficial	interests	include	shares	held	directly	or	indirectly	by	connected	persons.

2.	 Please	see	the	description	of	2009	LTIP	Part	B	and	2011	LTIP	awards	in	the	‘elements	of	previous	policy	that	will	continue	to	apply’	section	on	pages	61	to	62.

3.	 2009	LTIP	Part	B	option	exercise	price	£6.76	at	30	April	2014.

4.	 2011	LTIP	option	exercise	price	£11.36	at	30	April	2014.

2009 LTIP PART A
The	balance	of	the	shares	originally	awarded	under	the	2004(b)	LTIP	(i.e.	3/12	of	the	shares),	totalling	5,330,340	shares,	were	replaced	by	
options	with	an	exercise	price	of	£3.00	per	share	granted	under	the	2009	LTIP.	This	new	option	was	identified	as	Part	A	of	the	2009	LTIP.	These	
options	were	awarded	on	29	June	2009,	at	which	time	the	Element	2	awards	under	the	2004	(b)	LTIP	were	surrendered.	

During	the	year,	the	4,441,950	options	outstanding	under	the	2009	LTIP	Part	A	vested	and	were	exercised	on	31	January	2014	by	A	W	Pidgley,	
R	C	Perrins	and	G	J	Fry,	as	set	out	below.

These	options	represent	an	incentive	earned	by	the	Executive	Directors	over	the	last	10	years	(2004	–	2014).

Executive Director

A	W	Pidgley

R	C	Perrins

G	J	Fry

Notes

Type of award

2009	LTIP	Part	A

2009	LTIP	Part	A

2009	LTIP	Part	A

Number of Options 
Over Shares

Exercise Price of 
Exercised Options

Share Price on  
Date of Exercise

Gain on Exercise 
£’000

2,842,848

1,066,068

533,034

£1.36

£1.36

£1.36

£25.83

£25.83

£25.83	

69,564

26,087

13,043

1.	 The	original	exercise	price	was	adjusted	from	£3.00	to	£1.36	to	reflect	the	payment	of	dividends	during	the	vesting	period.	

There	are	no	options	vested	but	unexercised	at	30	April	2014.

DILUTION 
The	2009	LTIP	and	2011	LTIP	were	special	arrangements,	approved	by	shareholders	at	the	EGM	in	April	2009	and	AGM	in	September	2011	
respectively.	In	considering	dilution	under	the	2011	LTIP	the	Committee	took	account	of	the	long	term	nature	of	the	plan	which	extends	
beyond	the	length	of	normal	incentive	plans.	

In	addition,	the	Committee	took	into	account,	after	the	priority	return	of	£1.7	billion	(£13	per	share),	representing	183%	of	Net	Assets	at	 
30	April	2011,	that	the	dilution	on	existing	shareholders	until	the	hurdle	return	has	been	achieved	will	have	no	effect	and	the	dilution	will	only	
have	effect	on	the	value	created	above	the	priority	return	of	£1.7	billion.

74

75

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  GOVERNANCEBERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  GOVERNANCEGOVERNANCE300

250

200

150

100

50

0
2009

Notes

DIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION REPORT continued

PERFORMANCE AND PAY
The	graph	below	shows	the	Company’s	performance,	measured	by	total	shareholder	return	(TSR),	compared	with	the	performance	of	the	
FTSE250,	the	FTSE	All	Share	and	the	Company’s	remuneration	comparator	group	The	Company	considers	these	the	most	relevant	indices	for	
total	shareholder	return	disclosure	required	under	these	Regulations.

PERCENTAGE CHANGE IN GROUP CHAIRMAN’S AND THE MANAGING DIRECTOR’S REMUNERATION 
The	table	below	compares	the	percentage	increase	in	the	Group	Chairman’s	and	Managing	Director’s	pay	(including	salary,	taxable	benefits	
and	annual	bonus)	between	2012/13	and	2013/14,	with	the	average	change	for	the	wider	employee	population.	The	Company	considers	the	
full-time	employee	population,	excluding	the	Main	Board,	to	be	an	appropriate	comparator	group	and	the	most	stable	point	of	comparison:

Total shareholder return from 30 April 2009 (%)

Base	salary

Taxable	benefits

Annual	bonus

2012/13 to 2013/14 year on year change (%)

Group Chairman

Managing Director

Group employees

2.6%

22.4%

2.6%

3.0%

2.9%

3.0%

5.3%

4.6%

3.6%

RELATIVE IMPORTANCE OF SPEND ON PAY 
The	table	below	sets	out	the	relative	importance	of	spend	on	pay	in	the	2013/14	and	2012/13	financial	years	compared	with	distributions	to	
shareholders.	

Item

Remuneration	of	Group	employees	
(including	Directors)

Distributions	to	shareholders

2013/14 
(£m)

142

195

2012/13 
(£m)

97

20

% change

46%

875%

Berkeley Group 
Holdings plc

FTSE 250 Index

FTSE All Share Index

Comparator Group

2010

2011

2012

2013

2014

STATEMENT OF IMPLEMENTATION OF REMUNERATION POLICY IN THE FOLLOWING FINANCIAL YEAR 

1.	 	Total	shareholder	return	(“TSR”)	is	a	measure	showing	the	return	on	investing	in	one	share	of	the	Company	over	the	measurement	period	(the	return	is	the	value	of	

the	capital	gain	and	reinvested	dividends).	This	calculation	is	then	carried	out	for	the	relevant	indices	and	constituents	of	the	comparator	group.	

GROUP CHAIRMAN AND MANAGING DIRECTOR REMUNERATION OVER PAST 5 YEARS
The	table	below	shows	the	remuneration	of	the	Group	Chairman	and	Managing	Director	for	each	of	the	financial	years	shown	above.	 
Given	the	nature	of	the	roles	of	A	W	Pidgley	and	R	C	Perrins,	the	table	below	provides	this	information	for	both	individuals.	

Year

2013/14

2012/13

2011/12

2010/11

2009/10

Notes

Single figure of total remuneration (£’000)

Group 
Chairman

Managing 
Director

Annual bonus pay-out  
(as % maximum opportunity)

Multiyear incentive vesting 
awards (as % maximum 
opportunity)

3,757

3,638

2,799

2,033

2,406

2,271

2,198

1,692

1,226

1,127

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

See	Note	3

n/a

n/a

1.	 Single	figure	of	total	remuneration	for	each	year	has	been	calculated	in	accordance	with	the	Regulations.	

2.	 From	2010/11	onwards	the	annual	bonus	pay-out	figures	represent	annual	Company	contributions	under	the	Bonus	Plan.	

3.	 	2011/12,	2012/13	and	2013/14	multiyear	vesting	awards	represent	deferred	awards	that	were	released	during	the	year	under	the	Bonus	Plan.	In	accordance	with	the	

Bonus	Plan	rules	the	Company’s	contribution	is	earned	based	on	the	satisfaction	of	the	annual	performance	conditions.	Part	of	the	Company	contribution	is	
provided	as	a	deferred	award.	100%	of	these	deferred	awards	will	be	paid	out	unless	there	has	been	forfeiture	during	the	deferral	period	and	subject	to	continued	
employment	at	the	date	of	release.	At	the	year	ended	30	April	2014	there	has	not	been	a	forfeiture	event	under	the	Bonus	Plan.

EXECUTIVE DIRECTORS
The	remuneration	policy	and	its	implementation	for	the	forthcoming	financial	year	is	summarised	below:

SALARY
The	salaries	for	2014/15	are	set	out	below:

Executive Director

2013/14 Salary  
£’000

2014/2015 Salary 
£’000

% change

Lower Quartile

Median

Upper Quartile

FTSE 250 £’000

A	W	Pidgley

R	C	Perrins

N	G	Simpkin

G	J	Fry

K	Whiteman

S	Ellis

800

484

321

334

314

314

825

500

331

344

324

324

3.1

3.3

3.1

3.0

3.2

3.2

424

436

284

255

255

255

502

507

334

327

327

327

590

587

391

375

375

375

The	increases	agreed	by	the	Committee	for	the	Executive	Directors	reflects	the	Committee’s	policy	of	increasing	individual	Director’s	salaries	
over	time	to	reflect	their	experience,	performance	and	the	performance	of	the	Group.	In	reviewing	the	salaries	of	the	Executive	Directors,	the	
Committee	has	also	taken	account	of	the	employment	conditions	and	salary	increases	awarded	to	employees	throughout	the	Group,	which	
were	on	average	6.1%	this	year.

BENEFITS AND PENSION
No	changes	are	proposed	to	benefits	or	pension	in	2014/15.

76

77

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  GOVERNANCEBERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  GOVERNANCEGOVERNANCE 
DIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION REPORT continued

BONUS PLAN
The	maximum	bonus	potentials	for	the	year	ending	30	April	2015	are	set	out	below:

Executive Director

A W Pidgley

R C Perrins

N G Simpkin

Maximum	Bonus	(%	
of	salary)

300%

300%

220%

G J Fry

175%

K Whiteman

175%

S Ellis

220%

Key features of the Bonus Plan 
See	remuneration	policy	table	on	page	59	for	details	on	the	operation	of	the	Bonus	Plan.	

Performance conditions 
The	bonus	payable	to	each	of	the	Group	Chairman,	Group	Managing	Director	and	Group	Finance	Director	will	be	determined	by	reference	
to	the	Group	performance	condition.	For	the	Divisional	Directors,	50%	of	the	potential	bonus	payable	will	be	determined	by	reference	to	the	
Group	performance	condition	and	50%	by	reference	to	the	Divisional	PBT	performance	condition.

Group performance condition 
The	ROE	maximum	performance	condition	for	the	year	ending	30	April	2015	has	been	increased	from	20%	to	25%.	The	maximum	
performance	condition	for	land	bank	growth	remains	at	5%.	

The	following	table	sets	out	the	performance	conditions	for	the	Bonus	Plan	for	the	year	ended	30	April	2015:

Land Bank Growth

<0%

0.0%

Bonus	Plan	
Deduction

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

Performance Requirement Matrix

<20.0%

20.0%

21.0%

22.0%

23.0%

24.0%

25.0%

0%

50%

60%

70%

80%

90%

100%

y
t
i
u
q
E
n
o
n
r
u
t
e
R

Notes

0.0%

50.0%

1.0%

60.0%

2.0%

70.0%

3.0%

80.0%

4.0%

90.0%

5.0%

100.0%

0%

25%

30%

35%

40%

45%

50%

0%

30%

36%

42%

48%

54%

60%

0%

35%

42%

49%

56%

63%

70%

0%

40%

48%

56%

64%

72%

80%

0%

45%

54%

63%

72%

81%

90%

0%

50%

60%

70%

80%

90%

100%

1.	 	The	matrix	shows	the	percentage	of	each	of	the	performance	requirements	for	a	given	level	of	performance	and	the	corresponding	percentage	of	the	targeted	

maximum	annual	bonus	potential	that	could	be	earned	for	2014/15.

2.	 Straight	line	bonus	vesting	between	points.

3.	 Return	on	Equity	(ROE)	is	defined	as	profit	before	tax	divided	by	average	shareholders’	funds.

4.	 Land	Bank	Growth	is	defined	as	the	annual	percentage	increase	in	the	development	margin	in	the	land	bank.	

Divisional PBT performance condition 
The	Divisional	PBT	targets	are	set	at	the	beginning	of	the	financial	year	at	a	level	which	is	challenging	taking	into	account	the	potential	level	
of	bonus	payments,	the	market,	development	availability	and	other	relevant	issues.	It	is	the	view	of	the	Committee	that	the	disclosure	of	these	
targets	in	advance	would	provide	the	Company’s	competitors	with	an	unfair	advantage.	However	the	Committee	may	in	the	future	provide	
retrospective	disclosure	to	allow	shareholders	to	judge	the	level	of	bonus	actually	earned	against	the	relevant	Division’s	performance.

LONG-TERM INCENTIVES
No	changes	are	proposed	to	the	Company’s	long-term	incentive	arrangements	in	2014/15.	The	operation	of	the	historic	2009	and	2011	LTIP	
arrangements	are	set	out	in	the	Director’s	Remuneration	Policy	section	on	pages	61	to	62.

NON-EXECUTIVE DIRECTORS
The	following	table	sets	out	the	fee	rates	for	the	Non-executive	Directors	in	the	year	ended	30	April	2014	and	those	rates	which	will	apply	in	
the	year	ending	30	April	2015:		

Deputy	Chairman	and	SID	fees

Basic	Fee

Additional	fee	for	chairmanship	of	Audit	and	Remuneration	Committee

2013/14

£103,000

£56,500

£12,500

2014/15

£106,000

£58,500

£12,500

% change

2.9%

3.5%

–

CONSIDERATION BY THE DIRECTORS OF MATTERS RELATING TO DIRECTOR’S REMUNERATION 

MEMBERS OF THE COMMITTEE
The	committee	currently	comprises	three	Independent	Non-executive	Directors,	Glyn	Barker	(Chairman),	Sir	John	Armitt	and	Andy	Myers.

Glyn	Barker	(Chairman)	and	Sir	John	Armitt	were	members	of	the	committee	at	30	April	2014	and	Andy	Myers	was	appointed	to	the	
Committee	on	1	May	2014.

The	members	of	the	Committee	have	no	personal	financial	interest	other	than	as	shareholders	in	matters	to	be	decided,	no	potential	conflicts	
of	interest	arising	from	cross	Directorships	and	no	day-to-day	involvement	in	the	running	of	the	business.	

Director

Glyn	Barker

Sir	John	Armitt

Number of meetings during financial year

Number of meetings attended

2

2

2

2

ROLE OF THE COMMITTEE AND ACTIVITIES
The	key	responsibilities	of	the	Committee	are	to:

•	 	determine	and	agree	with	the	Board	the	broad	policy	for	the	remuneration	of	the	Executive	Directors.	This	includes	salary,	bonus	plans,	

share	options,	other	share	based	incentives	and	pensions;

•	 	determine	the	performance	conditions	for	the	Bonus	Plan	operated	by	the	Company	and	approve	the	total	annual	payments	made	under	

this	Plan;

•	 determine	all	share	incentive	plans	for	approval	by	the	Board	and	shareholders;

•	 take	into	account	the	views	of	shareholders	when	determining	plans	under	the	remuneration	policy;

•	 	ensure	that	the	contractual	terms	on	termination,	and	any	payments	made,	are	fair	to	the	individual	and	the	Company	and	that	failure	is	not	

rewarded;

•	 note	annually	the	remuneration	trends	and	any	major	changes	in	employee	benefit	structures	across	the	Company	or	Group.

The	Committee	has	formal	terms	of	reference	which	describes	its	full	remit.	This	can	be	downloaded	from	the	section	dealing	with	Investor	
Relations	on	the	Berkeley	website	(www.berkeleygroup.co.uk).

The	Committee’s	activities	during	the	2013/14	financial	year	included:	

Meeting

June	2013

March	2014

Items discussed

Draft	Remuneration	Report	for	the	year	ended	30th	April	2013

Pay	review	for	the	Group	for	the	year	ended	30th	April	2013

Executive	Remuneration	Benchmarking	report

New	Directors	Remuneration	regulations	and	changes	to	Remuneration	Report

78

79

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  GOVERNANCEBERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  GOVERNANCEGOVERNANCE 
 
 
DIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION REPORT continued

BERKELEY	ANNUAL	REPORT	2014		/		GOVERNANCE

DIRECTORS’ REPORT

ADVISORS TO THE COMMITTEE
The	Committee	is	able	to	seek	independent	advice	at	the	expense	of	the	Company;	no	advice	has	been	sought	by	the	Committee	during	the	
year	under	review.

In	determining	the	Executive	Directors’	remuneration	for	the	year,	the	Committee	consulted	with	the	Group	Chairman,	Tony	Pidgley,	the	
Group	Managing	Director,	Rob	Perrins	and	the	Group	Finance	Director,	Nick	Simpkin.	No	Director	played	a	part	in	any	discussion	about	his	
own	remuneration.	

In	addition,	the	Committee	had	access	to	information	on	executive	reward	provided	to	the	Board	by	PricewaterhouseCoopers	LLP	(PwC).	
PwC	is	a	member	of	Remuneration	Consultants	Group	and,	as	such,	voluntarily	operates	under	the	code	of	conduct	in	relation	to	executive	
remuneration	consulting	in	the	UK.

During	the	year,	the	Company	paid	a	retainer	fee	of	£50,000	to	PwC	for	services	in	relation	to	advice	provided	to	the	Board	that	was	also	used	
by	the	Committee.	

KPMG	have	been	the	Company’s	auditors	since	December	2013	and	have	therefore	audited	these	financial	statements.	Prior	to	this	PwC	
were	the	Company’s	auditors	and	the	Board	reviewed	the	nature	of	the	services	provided	during	this	time	and	was	satisfied	that	no	conflict	of	
interest	existed	in	the	provision	of	these	services.	

STATEMENT OF VOTING AT GENERAL MEETING
The	table	below	shows	the	advisory	vote	on	the	2012/13	Remuneration	Report	at	the	AGM	held	on	2nd	September	2013.	

2012/13	Remuneration	Report

Votes for

85,537,828

%

Votes against

%

Votes withheld

89.57%

9,955,633

10.42%

216,649

Please	note	that	the	first	votes	on	the	Annual	Report	on	Remuneration	and	the	Director’s	Remuneration	Policy	are	due	to	take	place	at	the	
2014	AGM.	

The	Directors’	Remuneration	Report	has	been	approved	by	the	Board.

By	Order	of	the	Board

GLYN BARKER
CHAIRMAN OF THE REMUNERATION COMMITTEE
11 JULY 2014

The	Directors	submit	their	report	together	
with	the	audited	consolidated	and	company	
financial	statements	for	the	year	ended	 
30	April	2014.

PRINCIPAL ACTIVITIES AND REVIEW OF THE
BUSINESS 
The	Company	is	the	UK	holding	company	
of	a	Group	engaged	in	residential-led	
property	development	focusing	on	urban	
regeneration	and	mixed-use	developments.	
The	Company	is	incorporated	and	domiciled	
in	England	and	Wales	and	is	quoted	on	the	
London	Stock	Exchange.	

The	information	that	fulfils	the	requirements	
of	the	Strategic	report	can	be	found	on	
pages	3	to	45	of	the	Annual	Report	which	
provide	more	detailed	commentaries	on	
the	business	performance	during	the	year	
together	with	the	outlook	for	the	future.	
In	addition,	information	in	respect	of	the	
principal	financial	and	operating	risks	of	 
the	business	is	set	out	on	pages	20	to	23	 
of	the	Strategic	Report.	

TRADING RESULTS AND DIVIDENDS 
The	Group’s	consolidated	profit	after	
taxation	for	the	financial	year	was	£292.9m	
(2013:	£209.7m).	The	Group’s	joint	ventures	
contributed	a	profit	after	taxation	of	£12.1m	
(2013:	loss	of	£1.3m).	

An	interim	dividend	of	90p	per	share	was	
paid	to	shareholders	on	17	January	2014.	 
A	further	interim	dividend	of	90p	per	share	
is	proposed,	payable	on	26	September	2014	
to	shareholders	on	the	register	on	22	August	
2014.

POST BALANCE SHEET EVENT
On	30	May	2014,	the	Group	exchanged	
contracts	for	the	sale	of	a	portfolio	of	ground	
rent	assets	for	£99.8	million.	The	sale	is	
expected	to	give	rise	to	a	non-recurring	profit	
on	disposal	of	approximately	£80	million	after	
transaction	costs	in	the	year	ending	30	April	
2015.

SHARE CAPITAL 
The	Company	had	135,357,183	ordinary	
shares	in	issue	at	30	April	2014	(2013:	
134,857,183).	No	shares	are	held	in	treasury.	
Authority	will	be	sought	from	shareholders	
at	the	forthcoming	Annual	General	Meeting	
to	renew	the	authority	given	at	the	2013	
Annual	General	Meeting	for	a	further	year,	
permitting	the	Company	to	purchase	its	own	
shares	in	the	market	up	to	a	limit	of	10%	of	its	
issued	share	capital.	

Movements	in	the	Company’s	share	capital	
are	shown	in	note	20	to	the	consolidated	
financial	statements.	

G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

Information	on	the	Group’s	share	option	
schemes	is	set	out	in	note	5	to	the	
consolidated	financial	statements.	Details	of	
the	Long-Term	Incentive	Schemes	and	Long-
Term	Incentive	Plans	for	key	executives	are	
set	out	in	the	Remuneration	Report	on	pages	
56	to	80.

ARTICLES OF ASSOCIATION 
The	Articles	of	Association	set	out	the	basic	
management	and	administrative	structure	
of	the	Company.	They	regulate	the	internal	
affairs	of	the	Company	and	cover	such	
matters	as	the	issue	and	transfer	of	shares,	
Board	and	shareholder	meetings,	powers	
and	duties	of	Directors	and	borrowing	
powers.	In	accordance	with	the	Articles	of	
Association,	Directors	can	be	appointed	
or	removed	by	shareholders	in	a	general	
meeting.	

The	Articles	may	only	be	amended	by	
special	resolution	at	a	general	meeting	of	
shareholders.	Copies	are	available	by	writing	
to	the	Company	Secretary	and	are	also	open	
to	inspection	at	Companies	House.	

DIRECTORS 
The	Directors	of	the	Company	and	their	
profiles	are	detailed	on	pages	48	and	49.	All	
of	these	Directors	served	throughout	the	year	
under	review	with	the	exception	of	Adrian	Li,	
who	was	appointed	on	2	September	2013,	
and	Andy	Myers,	who	was	appointed	on	 
6	December	2013.	Alan	Coppin	stood	down	
from	the	Board	on	2	September	2013.

The	Articles	of	Association	of	the	Company	
require	Directors	to	submit	themselves	for	
re-election	every	three	years.	In	addition	
all	Directors	are	subject	to	election	at	the	
first	opportunity	after	their	appointment	
to	the	Board.	However,	in	accordance	with	
the	UK	Corporate	Governance	Code	all	the	
Directors	will	offer	themselves	for	re-election	
at	the	forthcoming	Annual	General	Meeting,	
other	than	David	Howell,	who	is	standing	
down	from	the	Board.

The	Directors’	interests	in	the	share	capital	of	
the	Company	and	its	subsidiaries	are	shown	

in	the	Remuneration	Report	on	page	75.	At	
30	April	2014	each	of	the	Executive	Directors	
were	deemed	to	have	a	non-beneficial	
interest	in	106,799	(2013:	237,363)	ordinary	
shares	held	by	the	Trustees	of	The	Berkeley	
Group	Employee	Benefit	Trust.	The	trustee	
of	the	Berkeley	Group	Holdings	Employee	
Benefit	Trust	(“EBT”)	has	agreed	not	to	 
vote	on	any	shares	held	in	the	EBT	at	any	
general	meeting.	

There	were	no	contracts	of	significance	
during,	or	at	the	end	of,	the	financial	year	in	
which	a	Director	of	the	Company	is,	or	was,	
materially	interested,	other	than	those	set	
out	in	note	27	to	the	consolidated	financial	
statements,	the	contracts	of	employment	of	
the	Executive	Directors,	which	are	terminable	
within	one	year,	and	the	appointment	terms	
of	the	Non-executive	Directors,	which	are	
renewable	annually	and	terminable	on	one	
month’s	notice.	

DIRECTORS’ INDEMNITIES 
The	Company’s	practice	has	always	been	to	
indemnify	its	Directors	in	accordance	with	the	
Company’s	Articles	of	Association	and	to	the	
maximum	extent	permitted	by	law.	Qualifying	
third	party	indemnities,	under	which	the	
Company	has	agreed	to	indemnify	the	
Directors,	were	in	force	during	the	financial	
year	and	at	the	date	of	approval	of	the	
financial	statements,	in	accordance	with	the	
Company’s	Articles	of	Association	and	to	the	
maximum	extent	permitted	by	law,	in	respect	
of	all	costs,	charges,	expenses,	losses	and	
liabilities,	which	they	may	incur	in	or	about	
the	execution	of	their	duties	to	the	Company,	
or	any	entity	which	is	an	associated	company	
(as	defined	in	Section	256	of	the	Companies	
Act	2006),	or	as	a	result	of	duties	performed	
by	the	Directors	on	behalf	of	the	Company	or	
any	such	associated	company.	

SUBSTANTIAL SHAREHOLDERS 
The	Company	has	been	notified	of	the	
following	interests,	pursuant	to	Rule	5	of	the	
Disclosure	Rules	and	Transparency	Rules,	as	
at	11	July	2014:	

NUM BER O F 
ORD INARY   
SH ARES  HELD

%  OF ISSUED 
CAPITAL

NATURE OF 
HOLDING

13,092,232

9.67%

Indirect

First	Eagle	Investment	 
Management,	LLC

Anthony	William	Pidgley

Aberdeen	Asset	Managers

BlackRock	Inc.

6,781,124

6,719,188

6,699,472

Standard	Life	Investments	Ltd

6,599,895

William	Blair

6,553,042

5.01%

4.96%

4.95%

4.88%

4.84%

Direct

Indirect

Indirect

Indirect/Direct

Direct

80

81

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  GOVERNANCEDIRECTORS’ REPORT continued

DONATIONS 
The Group made no political contributions 
(2013: £nil) during the year. 

EMPLOYMENT POLICY 
The Group’s policy of operating through 
autonomous subsidiaries has ensured close 
consultation with employees on matters 
likely to affect their interests. The Group is 
firmly committed to the continuation and 
strengthening of communication lines with all 
its employees. 

An Equal Opportunities Policy was 
introduced in 2001. Following periodic 
reviews (the most recent in September 
2010) the policy is now an Equality and 
Diversity Policy with the aim of ensuring that 
all employees, potential employees and 
other individuals receive equal treatment 
(including access to employment, training 
and opportunity for promotion) regardless 
of their age, disability, gender reassignment, 
marriage and civil partnership, pregnancy 
and maternity, race, religion or belief 
(including lack of belief), sex and sexual 
orientation. It is the policy of the Group to 
support the employment of people with 
disabilities wherever practicable and to 
ensure, as far as possible, the training, career 
development and promotion opportunities 
are available to all employees. This policy 
includes employees who become disabled 
whilst employed by the Group. 

All disclosures concerning diversity of the 
Group’s Directors, senior management 
and employees (as required under the 
Companies Act 2006 (Strategic Report and 
Directors’ Report) Regulations 2013) are 
contained within the Strategic Report on 
pages 36 to 37.

SUSTAINABILITY 
The Group considers its approach to 
sustainability, defined as the effective 
management of environmental, social and 
economic risks and opportunities facing the 
company, to be an integral part of managing 
its business. Our framework for the business, 
Our Vision, sets out our integrated approach 
to managing sustainability within the context 
of the wider aims for the business. This 
approach is outlined within the Strategic 
Report and more extensive information is 
available on Berkeley’s website. We believe 
that this integrated approach demonstrates 
how sustainability is embedded within the 
day-to-day operations of our business.

We remain committed to enhancing the 
Group’s high standards through continuous 
improvement. Our Sustainability Governance 

Committee is responsible for setting the 
strategic objectives and the Main Board 
continues to monitor strategic development 
and progress against commitments and Key 
Performance Indicators. The Sustainability 
Working Group, comprising divisional 
executives and managers, is responsible for 
delivering these objectives and reviewing 
progress against targets. 

GREENHOUSE GAS EMISSIONS

Scope 1 (tCO2e) 

Scope 2 (tCO2e) 

Scope 3 (tCO2e) 

Total (tCO2e) 

2014

1,941

10,221

9,662

21,824

Emissions intensity (tCO2e/person) 

2.5

The Group has reported on greenhouse 
gas emissions for which it is responsible, 
as required under the Companies Act 2006 
(Strategic Report and Directors’ Reports) 
Regulations 2013. The emissions disclosed 
are aligned to the Group’s financial reporting 
year, are considered material to its business 
and have the following parameters:

Scope 1 – direct emissions relating to office, 
sales and development site activities; and 
work-related travel in company owned 
vehicles;

Scope 2 – indirect emissions from electricity 
consumed for office, sales and development 
site activities;

Scope 3 – other indirect emissions relating 
to office, sales and development site 
activities; work related travel in leased and 
employee owned vehicles; business air 
travel; transmission and distribution losses 
of purchased electricity; and upstream 
emissions

Emissions include 50% of those resulting 
from the Group’s joint ventures on the basis 
of its equity share.

The intensity ratio has been calculated using 
the total number of direct employees across 
the Group and the number of contractors 
working on our sites.

The GHG Protocol Corporate Accounting 
and Reporting Standard (revised edition), 
UK Government Environmental Reporting 
Guidelines 2013 and UK Government GHG 
Conversion Factors for Company Reporting 
2013 have been used to calculate and report 
the Group’s greenhouse gas emissions.

Further details on the methodology adopted 
can be found at berkeleygroup.co.uk/

sustainability/reports-and-opinions, and other 
environmental key performance indicators 
(KPIs) can be found at berkeleygroup.co.uk/
our-vision/performance-2012-2014.

HEALTH AND SAFETY 
The Group considers the effective 
management of health and safety to 
be an integral part of managing its 
business. Accordingly, the Group Main 
Board continues to monitor the strategic 
development and audit the implementation 
by all divisions of their Occupational Health 
& Safety Management Systems to ensure 
that, both at Group and divisional level, 
they remain compliant with recognised 
established standards. 

We remain committed to enhancing the 
Group’s high standards through continuous 
improvement. Our Health & Safety 
Committee is responsible for setting the 
strategic objectives of the Group, and the 
Health & Safety Working Group, comprising 
divisional executives and managers, is 
responsible for delivering these objectives 
and reviewing progress against targets set for 
our established key performance indicators, 
reporting this quarterly to the Group Main 
Board.

TAKEOVER DIRECTIVE – AGREEMENTS 
Pursuant to the Companies Act 2006, the 
Company is required to disclose whether 
there are any significant agreements that 
take effect, alter or terminate upon a change 
of control. 

Change of control provisions are included 
as standard in many types of commercial 
agreement, notably bank facility agreements 
and joint venture shareholder agreements, 
for the protection of both parties. Such 
standard terms are included in Berkeley’s 
bank facility agreement which contains 
provisions that give the banks certain rights 
upon a change of control of the Company. 
Similarly, in certain circumstances, a change 
of control may give Berkeley’s joint venture 
partner, Prudential Assurance Company 
Limited, the ability to exercise certain rights 
under the shareholder agreement in relation 
to its St Edward Homes joint venture. 

In addition, the Company’s share schemes 
contain provisions which take effect upon 
change of control. These do not entitle the 
participants to a greater interest in the shares 
of the Company than that created by the 
initial grant of the award. The Company does 
not have any arrangements with any Director 
that provide compensation for loss of office 
or employment resulting from a takeover. 

The remaining information required to be 
disclosed under the Takeover Directive 
can be found within notes 5 and 20 to the 
consolidated financial statements.

INDEPENDENT AUDITORS AND DISCLOSURE
OF INFORMATION TO AUDITORS 
Each of the persons who is a Director at 
the date of approval of this Annual Report 
confirms that: 

•   So far as the Director is aware, there is no 
relevant audit information of which the 
Company’s auditors are unaware; and

•   The Director has taken all the steps that 
he/she ought to have taken as a Director 
in order to make himself/herself aware 
of any relevant audit information and to 
establish that the Company’s auditors are 
aware of that information. 

This confirmation is given and should be 
interpreted in accordance with the provisions 
of Section 418 of the Companies Act 2006. 

A resolution to appoint KPMG LLP as 
auditors to the Company will be proposed at 
the Annual General Meeting.

ANNUAL GENERAL MEETING 
The Annual General Meeting of the 
Company is to be held at the Woodlands 
Park Hotel, Woodlands Lane, Stoke 
D’Abernon, Cobham, Surrey KT11 3QB 
at 11.00am on 1 September 2014. The 
Notice of Meeting, which is contained in a 
separate letter from the Group Chairman 
accompanying this report, includes 
a commentary on the business to be 
transacted at the Annual General Meeting. 

SHARE CAPITAL STRUCTURE 
The Company is compliant with DTR 
7.2.6. and the information relating to the 
Company’s share capital structure is included 
in the Directors’ Report on page 81.

STATEMENT OF DIRECTORS’ RESPONSIBILITIES
IN RESPECT OF THE ANNUAL REPORT AND
THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
The Directors are responsible for preparing 
the Annual Report, the Remuneration Report 
and the financial statements in accordance 
with applicable law and regulations. 

Company law requires the Directors to 
prepare financial statements for each 
financial year. Under that law the Directors 
have prepared the Group Financial 
Statements in accordance with International 
Financial Reporting Standards (IFRSs) as 
adopted by the European Union, and have 
prepared the Parent Company Financial 
Statements in accordance with United 
Kingdom Accounting Standards (United 

Kingdom Generally Accepted Accounting 
Practice) and applicable law. 

Under company law the Directors must not 
approve the financial statements unless they 
are satisfied that they give a true and fair 
view of the state of affairs of the Group and 
the Company and of the profit or loss of the 
Group for that period. 

In preparing these financial statements, the 
Directors are required to:

•   select suitable accounting policies and 

then apply them consistently;

•   make judgements and estimates that are 

reasonable and prudent;

•   state whether IFRS as adopted by the 
European Union and applicable UK 
accounting standards have been followed, 
subject to any material departures 
disclosed and explained in the Group and 
Parent Company Financial Statements 
respectively; and

•   prepare financial statements on the going 
concern basis unless it is inappropriate to 
presume that the Group will continue in 
business. 

The Directors are responsible for keeping 
adequate accounting records that are 
sufficient to show and explain the Company’s 
transactions and disclose with reasonable 
accuracy at any time the financial position of 
the Company and the Group and to enable 
them to ensure that the financial statements 
and the Remuneration Report comply with 
the Companies Act 2006 and, as regards the 
Group financial statements, Article 4 of the 
IAS Regulation. They are also responsible for 
safeguarding the assets of the Company and 
the Group and hence for taking reasonable 
steps for the prevention and detection of 
fraud and other irregularities. 

The Directors are responsible for the 
maintenance and integrity of the Company’s 
website. Legislation in the United Kingdom 
governing the preparation and dissemination 
of financial statements may differ from 
legislation in other jurisdictions. 

DIRECTORS’ RESPONSIBILITY STATEMENT 
Each of the Directors, whose names and 
functions are listed on pages 48 to 49 confirm 
that, to the best of each person’s knowledge: 

a.   the Group financial statements, which 

have been prepared in accordance with 
IFRS’s as adopted by the European Union, 
give a true and fair view of the assets, 
liabilities, financial position and profit of 
the Group; and

b.   the Strategic Report, together with the 

Directors’ report, includes a fair review of 
the development and performance of the 
business and the position of the Group, 
together with a description of the principal 
risks and uncertainties that it faces. 

c.   The Annual Report, taken as a whole, is 
fair, balanced and understandable and 
provides the information necessary for 
shareholders to assess the Company’s 
performance, business model and 
strategy.

GOING CONCERN 
The Group’s business activities together 
with the factors likely to affect its future 
development performance and position 
are set out in the Strategic Report. The 
financial position of the Group, its cash flows, 
liquidity position and borrowing facilities are 
all described in the Trading and Financial 
Review on pages 38 to 43.

The Group has significant financial resources 
and the Directors have assessed the future 
funding requirements of the Group, including 
the repayment of £1.7 billion to shareholders 
by 2021, and compared this to the level of 
committed loan facilities and cash resources 
over the medium term. In making this 
assessment consideration has been given 
to the uncertainty inherent in future financial 
forecasts and where applicable reasonable 
sensitivities have been applied to the key 
factors affecting the financial performance of 
the Group. 

The Directors have a reasonable expectation 
that the Company has adequate resources 
to continue its operational existence for 
the foreseeable future. For this reason they 
continue to adopt the going concern basis of 
accounting in preparing the annual financial 
statements.

By order of the Board 

EA DRIVER
COMPANY SECRETARY
THE BERKELEY GROUP HOLDINGS PLC
REGISTERED NUMBER: 5172586
11 JULY 2014

82

83

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  GOVERNANCEBERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  GOVERNANCEGOVERNANCE 
 
BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  FINANCIALS

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  FINANCIALS

FINANCIALS

ON TRACK TO MEET OUR  
AMBITIOUS TEN YEAR PLAN

F
I
N
A
N
C
I
A
L
S

84

85

INDEPENDENT AUDITORS’ REPORT TO THE MEMBERS 
OF THE BERKELEY GROUP HOLDINGS PLC

OPINIONS AND CONCLUSIONS ARISING FROM OUR AUDIT 

Our response: Our audit procedures in respect of this area included, amongst others:

1) OUR OPINION ON THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS IS UNMODIFIED 
We have audited the financial statements of The Berkeley Group Holdings plc for the year ended 30 April 2014 set out on pages 89 to 119.  
In our opinion: 

•   the financial statements give a true and fair view of the state of the Group’s and of the parent company’s affairs as at 30 April 2014 and of 

the Group’s profit for the year then ended; 

•   the Group financial statements have been properly prepared in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards as adopted by 

the European Union; 

•  the parent company financial statements have been properly prepared in accordance with UK Accounting Standards; and 

•   the financial statements have been prepared in accordance with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006 and, as regards the Group 

financial statements, Article 4 of the IAS Regulation. 

2) OUR ASSESSMENT OF RISKS OF MATERIAL MISSTATEMENT 
In arriving at our audit opinion above on the financial statements the risks of material misstatement that had the greatest effect on our audit 
were as follows: 

Carrying value of inventories and profit recognition (inventories: £2,481.2m, gross profit: £508.9m) 
Refer to page 54 (Audit Committee statement), page 96 (accounting policy) and page 106 (financial disclosures)

The risk: The Group recognises profit on each sale by reference to the overall site margin, which is the forecast profit percentage for a site 
that may comprise multiple phases and can last a number of years. The recognition of profit is therefore dependent on the Group’s estimate 
of future selling prices and build costs, which form the basis of the site forecast. Inventory represents the costs of land, materials, design and 
related production and site costs to date. It is held at the lower of cost and net realisable value, the latter also being based on the forecast for 
the site. As such errors in these forecasts can impact the assessment over the carrying value of inventories and gross profit.

Future selling prices are dependent on market conditions, which can be difficult to predict. Future build costs are subject to a number of 
variables including the accuracy of designs, market conditions in respect of materials and sub-contractor cost and construction issues. There is 
a risk that the actual revenue and costs are different to those forecast resulting in material misstatement of inventory and gross profit. 

There is also a risk that costs are inappropriately recognised within inventories or the allocation of costs that relate to the whole site, such as 
land and infrastructure, is inappropriate across development phases, resulting in a material misstatement of inventory or gross profit. 

Our response: Our audit procedures performed in this area included, amongst others:

Testing the Group’s controls by checking approvals over reviewing and updating selling price and cost forecasts, setting budgets and 
authorising and recording of costs. We attended a selection of management’s cost review meetings, to check that they are effectively 
challenging the costs incurred and forecast.

We inspected the site forecasts, on a sample basis, and challenged the assumptions for future costs and sales. This included comparing sales 
forecasts to sales made to date and to prices achieved on comparable local sales. We compared actual margins achieved to forecasts, to 
check the accuracy of the Group’s forecasting process. We corroborated a sample of cost forecasts back to supplier agreements or tenders 
and considered allowance for cost increase included in these forecasts. We also agreed a sample of costs incurred to date to invoice  
and/or payment, including checking that they were allocated to the appropriate site and development phase, and met the definition of 
inventory costs.

For all significant new land acquisitions and a sample of other land acquisitions we inspected purchase contracts to understand the terms and 
any deferred or contingent payments. We re-performed the calculation of such amounts to check the amounts recorded. We considered any 
previous acquisitions to establish any changes in amounts recorded for related deferred or contingent payments and assessed the accuracy 
of these. Where a site was pre-development, we evaluated the reliance on planning and other third party actions to achieve the forecast, and 
considered the impact on carrying values.

We checked that the margin recognised in the year on any units sold was in line with the forecast site margin. We evaluated the sensitivity of 
the margin to a change in sales prices and costs and considered whether this indicated a risk of impairment.

We considered the adequacy of the Group’s disclosures over inventory and the degree of judgement and estimation involved in arriving at the 
forecast and resultant profit.

Provisions (£57.1m) 
Refer to page 54 (Audit Committee statement), page 96 (accounting policy) and page 107 (financial disclosures)

The risk: The Group holds provisions in respect of construction related liabilities that have arisen, or that prior claims experience indicates may 
arise, subsequent to the completion of certain developments. The determination and valuation of provisions is judgmental by its nature and 
there is a risk that the estimate is incorrect and the provision is materially misstated. 

Enquiring of management and inspecting board minutes and the risk register for actual and potential claims arising in the year, and 
challenging whether provisions are required for these claims. For all significant known issues and claims provided for we inspected third party 
correspondence where available and compared it to the provision held. We also discussed claims with legal counsel. 

We inspected the calculation of the provision held. For known issues we challenged the cost forecast for work to be undertaken and, where 
possible, compared these to quotes to undertake the remediation. For claims that history indicated may arise, we evaluated settled issues 
and considered any differences in the development portfolio then and now, such as increasing complexity of construction, as evidence for the 
calculation of the provision.

We assessed each provision against the requirements of the relevant accounting standards and the Group’s policy and assessed whether the 
Group’s disclosures adequately disclose the potential liabilities of the Group. 

Revenue recognition (£1,620.6m) 
Refer to page 54 (Audit Committee statement), page 94 and 96 (accounting policy) and page 89 (financial disclosures)

The risk: It is the Group’s policy to recognise 100% of revenue on property units when contracts are exchanged and the building work is 
physically complete, being the point at which the Group is satisfied it has discharged its obligations to the buyer. Contract exchange, including 
the payment of a deposit, may have occurred sometime in the past. However, the legal completion of the sale remains dependent on the 
receipt of final payment. The recognition of revenue is generally before legal completion, being the point at which the balance of the sale is 
paid for and title transfers, and as such is potentially more subjective than recognising at the latter point. 

The risk is that the unit is not physically complete or that the buyer does not complete the purchase, as should either of these be the case the 
revenue should not be recognised. 

Our response: Our audit procedures on these areas included, among others;

Detailed testing of controls over sales approval and sample testing of sales in the year with a particular focus on significant sales recorded 
close to the year-end where the final payment was not yet received. 

We inspected the internal sign-off sheets to check that sales recorded in the year had gone through the Group’s approval process for sale 
of properties and the paperwork provided by third parties who approve the sale of newly constructed buildings, including the Council of 
Mortgage Lender approval, which is required to sell new build properties. 

For a sample of sales made in the year that were not legally complete at the year-end, we visited the sites around the year-end date to assess 
by physical inspection the extent to which building work was complete and the property was physically ready to be handed over to a buyer. 
After the year end, and up to the date of signing the audit report, we assessed whether final payments from buyers had been made and 
appeared as receipts in the bank statements. Where amounts were still outstanding we considered other information, such as correspondence 
agreeing later payments and reasons for this, in evaluating the recoverability of these amounts and appropriateness of related revenue 
recognition.

We have also considered the adequacy of the Group’s disclosures in respect of the judgements taken in recognising revenue for property units 
prior to legal completion.

3) OUR APPLICATION OF MATERIALITY AND AN OVERVIEW OF THE SCOPE OF OUR AUDIT 
The materiality for the Group financial statements as a whole was set at £18.0m, calculated using a benchmark of Group profit before taxation 
(of which it represents 4.7%) which we believe is the key benchmark used by members of the company in assessing financial performance. 

We agreed with the audit committee to report to it all corrected and uncorrected misstatements we identified through our audit with a value 
in excess of £0.9m, in addition to other audit misstatements below that threshold that we believe warranted reporting on qualitative grounds. 

Audits for Group reporting purposes were performed at key reporting components covering 93% of Group revenue; 95% of Group profit 
before taxation and 93% of Group total assets. Desktop reviews were performed on the remaining components. 

The audits undertaken for Group reporting purposes at the key reporting components of the company were all performed to local materiality 
levels, which were set individually for each subsidiary and ranged from £2.6 million to £14.1 million. These audits were completed by the 
Group audit team. 

4) OPINION ON OTHER MATTERS PRESCRIBED BY THE COMPANIES ACT 2006 
In our opinion: 

•  the part of the Directors’ Remuneration Report to be audited has been properly prepared in accordance with the Companies Act 2006; and

•   the information given in the Strategic Report and the Directors’ Report for the financial year for which the financial statements are prepared 

is consistent with the financial statements. 

86

87

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  FINANCIALSBERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  FINANCIALSFINANCIALSINDEPENDENT AUDITORS’ REPORT 
TO THE MEMBERS OF THE BERKELEY GROUP HOLDINGS PLC continued

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  FINANCIALS

CONSOLIDATED INCOME STATEMENT

5) WE HAVE NOTHING TO REPORT IN RESPECT OF THE MATTERS ON WHICH WE ARE REQUIRED TO REPORT BY EXCEPTION 
Under ISAs (UK and Ireland) we are required to report to you if, based on the knowledge we acquired during our audit, we have identified 
other information in the annual report that contains a material inconsistency with either that knowledge or the financial statements, a material 
misstatement of fact, or that is otherwise misleading. 

In particular, we are required to report to you if: 

•   we have identified material inconsistencies between the knowledge we acquired during our audit and the directors’ statement that they 

consider that the annual report and financial statements taken as a whole is fair, balanced and understandable and provides the information 
necessary for shareholders to assess the Group’s performance, business model and strategy; or

•  the Audit Committee Report does not appropriately address matters communicated by us to the audit committee.

For the year ended 30 April 

Revenue 

Cost of sales 

Gross profit 

Net operating expenses 

Operating profit 

Finance income 

Finance costs 

Under the Companies Act 2006 we are required to report to you if, in our opinion: 

Share of results of joint ventures using the equity method  

•   adequate accounting records have not been kept by the parent company, or returns adequate for our audit have not been received from 

branches not visited by us; or 

•   the parent company financial statements and the part of the Directors’ Remuneration Report to be audited are not in agreement with the 

accounting records and returns; or 

•  certain disclosures of directors’ remuneration specified by law are not made; or 

•  we have not received all the information and explanations we require for our audit. 

Under the Listing Rules we are required to review: 

•  the directors’ statement, set out on page 83, in relation to going concern; and 

•   the part of the Corporate Governance Statement on pages 50 to 53 relating to the company’s compliance with the nine provisions of the 

2010 UK Corporate Governance Code specified for our review.

We have nothing to report in respect of the above responsibilities. 

SCOPE OF REPORT AND RESPONSIBILITIES 
As explained more fully in the Directors’ Responsibilities Statement set out on page 83, the directors are responsible for the preparation  
of the financial statements and for being satisfied that they give a true and fair view. A description of the scope of an audit of accounts is 
provided on the Financial Reporting Council’s website at www.frc.org.uk/auditscopeukprivate. This report is made solely to the Company’s 
members as a body and subject to important explanations and disclaimers regarding our responsibilities, published on our website at 
www.kpmg.com/uk/auditscopeukco2013a which are incorporated into this report as if set out in full and should be read to provide an 
understanding of the purpose of this report, the work we have undertaken and the basis of our opinions. 

SEAN MCCALLION (SENIOR STATUTORY AUDITOR)
FOR AND ON BEHALF OF KPMG LLP, STATUTORY AUDITOR
CHARTERED ACCOUNTANTS 
15 CANADA SQUARE
LONDON, E14 5GL
11 JULY 2014

Notes 

3 

3 

10 

2, 4 

6 

2014 
£m 
1,620.6 
(1,111.7) 
508.9 
(134.1) 
374.8 
3.4 
(10.3) 
12.1 
380.0 
(87.1) 
292.9 

2013 
£m

1,372.6

(969.2)

403.4

(123.3)

280.1

1.5

(9.6)

(1.3)

270.7

(61.0)

209.7

7 

7 

221.8p 
188.4p 

160.0p

140.3p

F
I
N
A
N
C
I
A
L
S

Profit before taxation for the year 

Income tax expense 

Profit after taxation for the year 

Earnings per ordinary share: 

Basic 

Diluted 

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF COMPREHENSIVE INCOME

For the year ended 30 April 

Profit after taxation for the year 

Other comprehensive expense:

Items that will not be reclassified to profit or loss

Actuarial loss recognised in the pension scheme 

Deferred tax on actuarial loss recognised in the pension scheme 

Total items that will not be reclassified to profit or loss 

Items that may be reclassified subsequently to profit or loss

Change in value of other investments 

Total items that may be reclassified subsequently to profit or loss 

Other comprehensive income/(expense) for the year 

Total comprehensive income for the year 

Notes 

5 

6 

11 

2014 
£m 
292.9 

(0.6) 
0.1 
(0.5) 

1.0 
1.0 
0.5 
293.4 

2013 
£m

209.7

(0.8)

 0.2

(0.6)

–

–

(0.6)

209.1

88

89

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  FINANCIALS 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF CHANGES IN EQUITY

As at 30 April 
Assets 
Non-current assets 
Intangible assets 

Property, plant and equipment 

Investment properties 

Investments accounted for using the equity method 

Other investments 

Deferred tax assets 

Current assets 
Inventories 

Trade and other receivables 

Cash and cash equivalents 

Non-current assets classified as held for sale 

Total assets 

Liabilities

Non-current liabilities
Trade and other payables 

Provisions for other liabilities and charges 

Current liabilities
Borrowings 

Trade and other payables 

Current tax liabilities 

Provisions for other liabilities and charges 

Total liabilities 
Total net assets 
Equity 

Shareholders’ Equity
Share capital 

Share premium 

Capital redemption reserve 

Other reserve 

Revaluation reserve 

Retained profit 

Total equity 

Notes 

2014 
£m 

2013 
£m

8 

9 

9 

10 

11 

19 

12 

13 

14, 25 

15 

17 

18 

16 

17 

18 

20 

20 

21 

21 

21 

21 

17.2 
22.0 
7.2 
61.4 
11.0 –
61.1 
179.9 

2,481.2 
159.0 
130.2 
2,770.4 
– 
2,770.4 
2,950.3 

(148.6) 
(48.5) 
(197.1) 

(1.0) 
(1,218.6) 
(83.7) 
(8.6) 
(1,311.9) 
(1,509.0) 
1,441.3 

6.8 
49.3 
24.5 
(961.3) 
4.1 
2,317.9 
1,441.3 

 17.2

 16.3

 26.5

 44.1

56.7

 160.8

 2,066.7

 126.8

 66.8

 2,260.3

75.8

2,336.1

 2,496.9

(115.5)

(27.9)

(143.4)

(22.1)

(905.9)

(102.0)

(1.1)

(1,031.1)

(1,174.5)

 1,322.4

 6.7 

 49.3 

 24.5

(961.3)

 4.0

2,199.2

 1,322.4

Capital 
 Share    redemption  

Share  
capital  
£m 

Notes 

 premium  
£m 

 reserve    reserve  
£m 

 £m 

 Other   Revaluation  
 reserve  
£m 

 Retained 
 earnings  
£m 

 Total 
£m

At 1 May 2013 

Profit after taxation for the year 

Other comprehensive income for the year 

Total comprehensive income for the year 

Reserves transfer from revaluation reserve  

Issue of ordinary shares 

Transactions with shareholders: 

  Credit in respect of employee 

share schemes  

  Deferred tax in respect of 
  employee share schemes 

  Dividends to equity holders of

the Company 

At 30 April 2014 

6.7 

49.3 

24.5 

 (961.3) 

4.0 

2,199.2  1,322.4

– 

– 

– 

– 

0.1 

– 

– 

– 

21 

20 

5 

6 

22 

 – 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

 – 

 – 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

0.1 

– 

– 

– 

– 

292.9 

292.9

0.5 

0.5

293.4 

293.4

(0.1) 

– 

–

0.1

3.3 

3.3

17.3 

17.3 

(195.2) 

(195.2)

6.8 

49.3 

24.5 

 (961.3) 

4.1 

2,317.9  1,441.3

Capital  
 Share    redemption  

Share  
capital  
£m 

Notes 

 premium  
£m 

 reserve    reserve  
£m 

 £m 

 Other   Revaluation  
 reserve  
£m 

 Retained 
 earnings  
£m 

 Total 
£m

At 1 May 2012 

Profit after taxation for the year 

Other comprehensive expense for the year 

Total comprehensive income for the year 

Reserves transfer from revaluation reserve 

Transactions with shareholders: 

  Credit in respect of employee 

share schemes 

  Deferred tax in respect of 
  employee share schemes  

  Dividends to equity holders of

the Company 

At 30 April 2013 

6.7 

49.3 

24.5 

(961.3) 

3.4 

1,977.2  1,099.8

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

21 

5 

6 

22 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

 – 

– 

 – 

 – 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

209.7 

209.7

(0.6) 

(0.6)

209.1 

209.1

0.6 

(0.6) 

–

– 

– 

– 

11.8 

11.8

21.4 

21.4

(19.7) 

(19.7)

6.7 

49.3 

24.5 

 (961.3) 

4.0 

2,199.2  1,322.4

The financial statements on pages 89 to 114 were approved by the board of directors on 11 July 2014 and were signed on its behalf by:

N G SIMPKIN
FINANCE DIRECTOR

90

91

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  FINANCIALSBERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  FINANCIALSFINANCIALS 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
CONSOLIDATED CASH FLOW STATEMENT

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  FINANCIALS

For the year ended 30 April 

Cash flows from operating activities
Cash generated from operations 

Interest received 

Interest paid 

Income tax paid 

Net cash flow from operating activities 

Cash flows from investing activities
Purchase of property, plant and equipment 

Purchase of financial assets 

Proceeds on disposal of property, plant and equipment 

Proceeds from sale of investment properties 

Movements in loans with joint ventures 

Net cash flow from investing activities 

Cash flows from financing activities
Repayment of borrowings 

Dividends paid to Company’s shareholders 

Net cash flow from financing activities 

Net increase in cash and cash equivalents 

Cash and cash equivalents at the start of the financial year 

Cash and cash equivalents at the end of the financial year 

Notes 

25 

9 

10 

22 

14, 25 

2014 
£m 

259.7 
2.7 
(5.0) 
(92.4) 
165.0 

(8.9) 
(10.0) –
0.6 
138.2 
(5.2) 
114.7 

(21.1) 
(195.2) 
(216.3) 

63.4 
66.8 
130.2 

2013 
£m

189.0

1.2

(5.9)

(69.2)

115.1

(6.6)

0.1

12.6

1.1

7.2

(38.5)

(19.7)

(58.2)

64.1

2.7

66.8

F
I
N
A
N
C
I
A
L
S

1 ACCOUNTING POLICIES 
GENERAL INFORMATION
The Berkeley Group Holdings plc (the “Company”) is a public limited company incorporated and domiciled in the United Kingdom. The address of its registered 
office is Berkeley House, 19 Portsmouth Road, Cobham, Surrey, KT11 1JG. The Company and its subsidiaries (together the “Group”) are engaged in residential-led, 
mixed-use property development. Further information about the nature of the Group’s operations and its principal activities are set out in the Directors’ Report on 
page 81.

BASIS OF PREPARATION
These Consolidated Financial Statements have been prepared in accordance with European Union endorsed International Financial Reporting Standards (“IFRSs”), 
IFRS-IC interpretations and with those parts of the Companies Act 2006 applicable to companies reporting under IFRS. The Consolidated Financial Statements have 
been prepared under the historical cost convention and on the going concern basis. Historical cost is generally based on the fair value of the consideration given in 
exchange for the assets.

The preparation of financial statements in conformity with IFRS requires the use of certain critical accounting estimates. It also requires management to exercise its 
judgement in the process of applying the Group’s accounting policies. The areas involving a higher degree of judgement or complexity, or areas where assumptions 
and estimates are significant to the Consolidated Financial Statements, are disclosed on page 96.

The following new standards, amendments to standards and interpretations are applicable to the Group and are mandatory for the first time for the financial year 
beginning 1 May 2013: IAS 12 (Amendment) “Income Taxes”; IAS 19 (Revised 2011) “Employee Benefits”; IAS 1 (Amendment) “Presentation of Items of Other 
Comprehensive Income”; IFRS 13 (Amendment) “Fair Value Measurement”; and Annual improvements to IFRSs 2009 - 2011 Cycle.

The adoption by the Company of IAS 19 Employee Benefits did not have a material effect on the consolidated financial statements for the year ended 30 April 2013 
(the effect being less than £0.2 million) which have not therefore been restated. The adoption of IAS 19 has resulted in the replacement of the interest cost on the 
defined benefit obligation and the expected return on plan assets with a net interest cost based on the net defined benefit asset or liability and the discount rate, 
measured at the start of the year. 

The other standards have not had a material impact on the results of the Company for the year ended 30 April 2014.

The following new standards, amendments to standards and interpretations have been issued, but are not yet effective for the financial year ending 30 April 2014 and 
have not been adopted early: IFRS 10 Consolidated Financial Statements; IFRS 11 Joint Arrangements; IFRS 12 Disclosure of Interest in Other Entities; and IAS 28 
(Amendment) Investments in Associates and Joint Ventures.

These standards are not expected to have a significant impact on the Consolidated Financial Statements.

The Group has significant financial resources and the Directors have assessed the future funding requirements of the Group and compared this to the level of 
committed loan facilities and cash resources over the medium term. In making this assessment, consideration has been given to the uncertainty inherent in future 
financial forecasts and where applicable, reasonable sensitivities have been applied to the key factors affecting the financial performance of the Group. The Directors 
have a reasonable expectation that the Group has adequate resources to continue its operational existence for the foreseeable future. For this reason they continue to 
adopt the going concern basis of accounting in preparing its consolidated financial statements.

BASIS OF CONSOLIDATION
(a) Subsidiaries

The Consolidated Financial Statements comprise the financial statements of the Parent Company and all its subsidiary undertakings. The accounting date for 
subsidiary undertakings is 30 April.

Subsidiary undertakings are entities that are directly or indirectly controlled by the Group. Control exists where the Group has the power to govern the financial and 
operating policies of the entity so as to obtain the benefits from its activities. 

Subsidiaries are fully consolidated from the date on which control is transferred to the Group. They are de-consolidated from the date that control ceases.

The purchase method of accounting is used to account for the acquisition of subsidiary undertakings by the Group. The cost of an acquisition is measured as the fair 
value of the assets given, equity instruments issued and liabilities incurred or assumed at the date of exchange, plus costs directly attributable to the acquisition. 
Identifiable assets acquired and liabilities and contingent liabilities assumed in a business combination are measured initially at their fair values at the acquisition date, 
irrespective of the extent of any non-controlling interest. The excess of cost of acquisition over the fair value of the Group’s share of identifiable net assets acquired is 
recorded as goodwill. If the cost of the acquisition is less than the fair value of the net assets of the subsidiary acquired, the difference is recognised directly in the 
income statement.

Where necessary, adjustments are made to the financial statements of subsidiaries to bring the accounting policies used into line with those used by the Group. 

All intra-Group transactions, balances, income and expenses are eliminated on consolidation. Acquisition-related costs are expensed as incurred.

(b) Joint ventures

Entities which are jointly controlled with another party or parties (“joint ventures”) are accounted for using the equity method of accounting. The results attributable to 
the Group’s holding in joint ventures are shown separately in the consolidated income statement. The amount included in the consolidated statement of financial 
position is the Group’s share of the net assets of the joint ventures plus net loans receivable. Goodwill arising on the acquisition of joint ventures is accounted for in 
accordance with the policy set out above. The carrying value of goodwill is included in the carrying value of the investment in joint ventures. On transfer of land and/or 
work in progress to joint ventures, the Group recognises only its share of any profits or losses, namely that proportion sold outside the Group.

SEGMENTAL REPORTING
Operating segments are identified in a manner consistent with the internal reporting provided to the chief operating decision-maker. The Group determines its 
reportable segments having regard to permitted aggregation criteria with the principal condition being that the operating segments should have similar economic 
characteristics.

The Group is predominantly engaged in residential-led, mixed-use property development, comprising residential revenue, revenue from land sales and commercial 
revenue.

For the purposes of determining its operating segments, the chief operating decision-maker has been identified as the Executive Committee of the Board. 

This committee approves investment decisions, allocates the Group’s resources and reviews the internal reporting in order to assess performance. 

92

93

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  FINANCIALS 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS continued

1 ACCOUNTING POLICIES CONTINUED 
The Group has determined that its operating segments are the management teams that report into the Executive Committee of the Board. These management teams 
are all engaged in residential-led, mixed-use development in the United Kingdom and, having regard to the aggregation criteria in IFRS 8, the Group has one 
reportable operating segment.

In addition to its development activities, the Group holds certain residential properties for investment purposes. These investment activities represent a separate 
segment which is included within “Other activities”, as they do not meet the size thresholds to be disclosed as a separate reportable segment.

REVENUE
Revenue represents the amounts receivable from the sale of properties and investment properties during the year and other income directly associated with property 
development. Properties are treated as sold and profits are recognised when contracts are exchanged and the building work is physically complete. 

Rental income is recognised in the income statement on a straight line basis over the life of the lease. Any lease incentives are recognised as an integral part of the 
total rental income.

EXPENDITURE
Expenditure recorded in inventory is expensed through cost of sales at the time of the related property sale. Net operating expenditure is recognised in respect of 
goods and services received when supplied in accordance with contractual terms. Provision is made when an obligation exists for a future liability in respect of a past 
event and where the amount of the obligation can be reliably estimated. See Accounting estimates and judgements below for further disclosures on cost recognition.

TAXATION
The taxation expense represents the sum of the current tax payable and deferred tax. Current tax, including UK corporation tax, is provided at the amounts expected 
to be paid (or received) using the tax rules and laws that have been enacted, or substantively enacted, by the reporting date.

Deferred taxation is the tax expected to be payable or recoverable on differences between the carrying amounts of assets and liabilities in the financial statements and 
corresponding tax bases used in the computation of taxable profit, and is accounted for using the balance sheet liability method. Deferred tax liabilities are generally 
recognised on all taxable temporary differences. Deferred tax assets are recognised to the extent that it is probable that taxable profits will be available against which 
deductible temporary differences can be utilised. Such assets and liabilities are not recognised if the temporary difference arises from goodwill, or from the initial 
recognition (except in a business combination) of other assets and liabilities in a transaction that affects neither the taxable profit nor the accounting profit, or from 
differences relating to investments in subsidiaries to the extent that it is probable that they will not reverse in the foreseeable future.

Deferred taxation is calculated at the tax rates that are expected to apply in the period when the liability is settled or the asset is realised based on tax laws and rates 
that have been enacted or substantively enacted at the balance sheet date. The carrying value of deferred tax assets is reviewed at each balance sheet date and 
reduced to the extent that it is no longer probable that sufficient taxable profits will be available against which taxable temporary differences can be utilised. Deferred 
taxation is charged or credited to the income statement, except when it relates to items charged or credited directly to reserves, in which case the deferred taxation is 
also dealt with in reserves.

Deferred taxation assets and liabilities are offset when there is a legally enforceable right to offset current tax assets against current tax liabilities and when the deferred 
taxation assets and liabilities relate to income taxes levied by the same taxation authority on either the taxable entity or different taxable entities where there is an 
intention to settle the balances on a net basis.

INTANGIBLE ASSETS
Where the cost of acquiring new and additional interests in subsidiaries, joint ventures and businesses exceeds the fair value of the net assets acquired, the resulting 
premium on acquisition (goodwill) is capitalised and its subsequent measurement is based on annual impairment reviews and impairment reviews performed where an 
impairment indicator exists, with any impairment losses recognised immediately in the income statement. Goodwill is allocated to cash-generating units for the 
purpose of impairment testing. The allocation is made to those cash-generating units or groups of cash-generating units that are expected to benefit from the 
business combination in which the goodwill arose. 

PROPERTY, PLANT AND EQUIPMENT
Property, plant and equipment is carried at historic purchase cost less accumulated depreciation. Cost includes the original purchase price of the asset and the costs 
attributable to bringing the asset to its working condition for its intended use. Depreciation is provided to write off the cost of the assets on a straight line basis to their 
residual value over their estimated useful lives at the following annual rates:

Freehold buildings 

Motor vehicles 

2% 

25% 

Fixtures and fittings 

15% / 20%

Computer equipment 

33 1/3 %

Freehold property disclosed in the notes to the consolidated financial statements consists of both freehold land and freehold buildings. No depreciation is provided 
on freehold land. Computer equipment is included within fixtures and fittings. The assets’ residual values, carrying values and useful lives are reviewed on an annual 
basis and adjusted if appropriate at each balance sheet date. Where an impairment is identified, the recoverable amount of the asset is identified and an impairment 
loss, where appropriate, is recognised in the income statement.

Subsequent costs are included in the assets’ carrying amount or recognised as a separate asset, as appropriate, only when it is probable that future economic benefits 
associated with the item will flow to the Group and the cost of the item can be measured reliably. The carrying amount of the replaced part is derecognised. All other 
repairs and maintenance are charged to the income statement during the financial period in which they are incurred.

Gains and losses on disposals are determined by comparing the proceeds with the carrying amount and are recognised within net operating expenses in the income 
statement.

INVESTMENT PROPERTIES
Investment properties, which are properties held to earn rental income, are recognised using the “cost model” and are carried in the statement of financial position at 
historic cost less accumulated depreciation.

Depreciation is provided to write off the element of the cost of the assets that relates to buildings at 2% per annum on a straight line basis. No depreciation is charged 
on the element of the cost of the assets that relates to land. 

Sales of investment properties are recognised in revenue and cost sales. These are considered to be similar in nature to the underlying property sales of the Group.

INVENTORIES
Property in the course of development and completed units are valued at the lower of cost and net realisable value. Direct cost comprises the cost of land, raw 
materials and development costs but excludes indirect overheads. Provision is made, where appropriate, to reduce the value of inventories and work in progress to 
their net realisable value.

Land purchased for development, including land in the course of development, is initially recorded at cost. Where such land is purchased on deferred settlement 
terms, and the cost differs from the amount that will subsequently be paid in settling the liability, this difference is charged as a finance cost in the income statement 
over the period to settlement.

TRADE AND OTHER RECEIVABLES
Trade receivables are recognised initially at fair value and subsequently measured at amortised cost using the effective interest method, less provision for impairment. 
A provision for impairment of trade receivables is established when there is objective evidence that the Group will not be able to collect all amounts due according to 
the original terms of the receivables. The amount of the provision is the difference between the asset’s carrying amount and the present value of estimated future cash 
flows, discounted at the original effective interest rate. The carrying amount of the asset is reduced through the use of an allowance account, and the amount of the 
loss is recognised in the income statement within net operating expenses. When a trade receivable is uncollectible, it is written off against the allowance account for 
trade receivables. Subsequent recoveries of amounts previously written off are credited against net operating expense in the income statement.

CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS
Cash and cash equivalents comprises cash balances in hand and at the bank, including bank overdrafts repayable on demand which form part of the Group’s cash 
management, for which offset arrangements across Group businesses have been applied where appropriate.

SHARE CAPITAL
Ordinary shares are classified as equity. 

Incremental costs directly attributable to the issue of new shares or options are shown in equity as a deduction, net of tax, from the proceeds.

Where any Group company purchases the Company’s equity share capital (treasury shares), the consideration paid, including any directly attributable incremental costs 
(net of income taxes) is deducted from equity attributable to the Company’s equity holders until the shares are cancelled, sold or reissued. Where such shares are 
subsequently sold or reissued, any consideration received, net of any directly attributable incremental transaction costs and the related income tax effects, is included 
in equity attributable to the Company’s equity holders.

BORROWINGS
Borrowings are recognised initially at fair value, net of transaction costs incurred. Any difference between the proceeds (net of transaction costs) and the redemption 
value is recognised in the income statement over the period of the borrowings using the effective interest method.

TRADE AND OTHER PAYABLES
Trade and other payables on normal terms are not interest bearing and are stated at their nominal value which is considered to be their fair value. Trade payables on 
extended terms are recorded at their fair value at the date of acquisition of the asset to which they relate. The discount to nominal value is amortised over the period 
of the credit term and charged to finance costs.

PROVISIONS
Provisions are recognised when the Group has a present legal or constructive obligation as a result of past events, and it is probable that an outflow of resources will 
be required to settle that obligation, and the amount has been reliably estimated.

DEPOSITS
New property deposits and on account contract receipts are held within current trade and other payables.

EMPLOYEE BENEFITS
(a) Pensions

The Group accounts for pensions under IAS 19 “Employee benefits”. The Group has both defined benefit and defined contribution plans. The defined benefit plan 
was closed to future accrual with effect from 1 April 2007.

For the defined benefit scheme, the obligations are measured using the projected unit method. The calculation of the net obligation is performed by a qualified 
actuary. The operating and financing costs of these plans are recognised separately in the income statement; service costs are set annually on the basis of actuarial 
valuations of the scheme and financing costs are recognised in the period in which they arise. Actuarial gains and losses are recognised immediately in the statement 
of comprehensive income. In accordance with IAS 19 the Group does not recognise on the statement of financial position any surplus in the scheme.

Pension contributions under defined contribution schemes are charged to the income statement as they fall due.

(b) Share-based payments

Where the Company operates equity-settled, share-based compensation plans, the fair value of the employee services received in exchange for the grant of the 
options is recognised as an expense. The total amount to be expensed over the vesting period is determined by reference to the fair value of the options granted.  
At each balance sheet date, the Group revises its estimates of the number of options that are expected to vest. It recognises the impact of the revision to original 
estimates, if any, in the income statement, with a corresponding adjustment to equity.

The proceeds received net of any directly attributable transaction costs are credited to share capital (nominal value) and share premium when the options are 
exercised. 

DIVIDENDS
Dividend distributions to shareholders are recognised as a liability in the period in which the dividends are appropriately authorised and approved for payout and are 
no longer at the discretion of the Company. Unpaid dividends that do not meet these criteria are disclosed in the notes to the financial statements.

LEASING AGREEMENTS
Payments and receipts under operating lease agreements are charged or credited against profit on a straight line basis over the life of the lease.

94

95

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  FINANCIALSBERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  FINANCIALSFINANCIALSNOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS continued

1 ACCOUNTING POLICIES CONTINUED 
ACCOUNTING ESTIMATES AND JUDGEMENTS
Management applies the Group’s accounting policies as described above when making critical accounting judgements, of which no individual judgement is deemed 
to have a significant impact upon the financial statements, apart from those involving estimations, which are detailed below.

(a) Carrying value of land and work in progress and estimation of costs to complete

The Group holds inventories stated at the lower of cost and net realisable value. Such inventories include land, work in progress and completed units. As residential 
development is largely speculative by nature, not all inventories are covered by forward sales contracts. Furthermore due to the nature of the Group’s activity and, in 
particular the scale of its developments and the length of the development cycle, the Group has to allocate site-wide development costs between units being built 
and/or completed in the current year and those for future years. It also has to forecast the costs to complete on such developments.

In making such assessments and allocations, there is a degree of inherent estimation uncertainty. The Group has established internal controls designed to effectively 
assess and centrally review inventory carrying values and ensure the appropriateness of the estimates made.

(b) Provisions

The Group makes assumptions to determine the timing and its best estimate of the quantum of its construction and other liabilities for which provisions are held.

(c) Revenue recognition

3 NET FINANCE COSTS

Finance income 

Finance costs:

Interest payable on bank loans and non-utilisation fees 

Amortisation of facility fees 

Other finance costs 

Net finance costs 

Finance income predominantly represents interest earned on cash deposits.

Other finance costs represent imputed interest on taxation and on land purchased on deferred settlement terms.

Assumptions are made which complement external certifications to assess whether the building work for properties sold is physically complete and hence whether the 
Group’s revenue recognition criteria have been satisfied.

4 PROFIT BEFORE TAXATION
Profit before taxation is stated after charging/(crediting) the following amounts:

2014 
£m 
3.4 

(5.1) 
(1.3) 
(3.9) 
(10.3) 
(6.9) 

2014 
£m 
177.3 
1.9 
0.7 
(43.2) 
(0.9) 
0.2 
2.7 
– 

– 
0.1 
– 
– 
0.2 

0.1 
0.1 

2013 
£m

1.5

(4.8)

(0.9)

(3.9)

(9.6)

(8.1)

2013 
 £m 

138.2

1.8

–

(3.6)

(8.1)

4.8

1.9

0.2

0.1

0.1

0.1

0.2

–

–

–

Staff costs (note 5) 

Depreciation of property, plant and equipment (note 9) 

Loss on sale of fixed assets 

Profit on sale of investment properties 

Rental income from investment properties 

Direct operating expense in relation to investment properties including depreciation 

Operating lease costs  

Fees paid and payable to the Company’s previous auditor for the audit of the Parent Company  

and consolidated financial statements

Fees paid and payable to the Company’s previous auditor for other services:

– Audit of the Company’s subsidiaries 

– Audit related assurance services 

– Taxation compliance services 

– All other non-audit services 

Fees paid and payable to the Company’s current auditor for the audit of the Parent Company  

and consolidated financial statements

Fees paid and payable to the Company’s current auditor for other services:

– Audit of the Company’s subsidiaries 

– Taxation compliance services 

The value of inventories expensed and included in the cost of sales is £1,032.9m (2013: £895.3m).

In addition to the above services, the Group’s current auditor has been asked to act as auditor to The Berkeley Final Salary Plan. The appointment of auditors to the 
Group’s pension scheme and the fees paid in respect of the audit are agreed by the trustees of the scheme, who act independently of the management of the Group. 
The fees paid to the Group’s auditors for audit services to the pension scheme during the year were £nil (2013: £nil).

Fees paid and payable to the Company’s current auditor for other services disclosed in the table above relate only to the period from the date of appointment of  
6 December 2013. Fees paid in respect of the full year ended 30 April 2014 were £0.1 for taxation compliance services and £0.1 for all other non-audit services. 

Remuneration paid to the Company’s previous auditors in respect of audit related assurance services relates to the interim review.

(d) Share-based payments

Assumptions are made in determining the fair value of employee services received in exchange for the grant of options under share-based payment awards at the 
date of grant.

2 SEGMENTAL DISCLOSURE
For the purposes of determining its operating segments, the chief operating decision-maker has been identified as the Executive Committee of the Board. 

This committee approves investment decisions, allocates the Group’s resources and reviews the internal reporting in order to assess performance. 

The Group has determined that its operating segments are the management teams that report into the Executive Committee of the Board. These management teams 
are all engaged in residential-led, mixed-use development in the United Kingdom and, having regard to the aggregation criteria in IFRS 8, the Group has one 
reportable operating segment.

In addition to its development activities, the Group holds certain residential properties for investment purposes. These investment activities represent a separate 
segment which is included within other activities as it does not meet the size thresholds to be disclosed as separate reportable segments. Revenue and operating 
profit for the year ended 30 April 2014 include £105.4 million and £29.6 million, respectively, on the sale of 534 properties to M&G Investments and £32.8 million and 
£13.6 million, respectively, on the sale of 141 other investment properties.

Segment results 

Profit before tax

Residential-led mixed-use development 

Other activities 

2014 
£m 

379.7 
0.3 
380.0 

2013 
£m

269.7

1.0

270.7

Segment profit before tax represents the profit before tax allocated to each segment. This is the measure reported to the Executive Committee of the Board for the 
purpose of resource allocation and assessment of segment performance.

Segment assets 

Assets

Residential-led mixed-use development 

Other activities 

2014 
£m 

2,943.1 
7.2 
2,950.3 

2013 
£m 

2,394.6

102.3

2,496.9

For the purpose of monitoring segment performance and allocating resources between segments all assets are considered to be attributable to residential-led 
mixed-use development with the exception of investment properties which are held for the Group’s investing activities and have therefore been allocated to  
other activities.

96

97

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  FINANCIALSBERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  FINANCIALSFINANCIALS 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS continued

5 DIRECTORS AND EMPLOYEES

Staff costs

Wages and salaries 

Social security costs 

Share-based payments 

Pension costs  

2014 
£m 

141.8 
28.5 
3.3 
3.7 
177.3 

2013 
£m 

97.4

26.0

11.8

3.0

138.2

The average monthly number of persons employed by the Group during the year was 1,647 (2013: 1,326).

KEY MANAGEMENT COMPENSATION
Key management comprises the Main Board, as the Directors are considered to have the authority and responsibility for planning, directing and controlling the 
activities of the Group. Details of Directors’ emoluments are set out in the Remuneration Report on pages 56 to 80.

EQUITY-SETTLED SHARE-BASED PAYMENTS
The Group operates three equity-settled share based payments schemes. The charge to the income statement in respect of share-based payments in the year relating 
to grants of share options awarded under the 2009 Long-Term Incentive Plan and the 2011 Long-Term Incentive Plan was £9.0m (2013: £11.8m). The charge to the 
income statement attributable to key management is £2.3m (2013: £10.9m).

There were no exercisable share options at the end of the year.

2009 Long-Term Incentive Plan 
Part A

On 29 June 2009 the balance of the shares originally awarded under the 2004(b) Long-Term Incentive Plan, totalling 5,330,340 shares, were replaced by options under 
Part A of the 2009 Long-Term Incentive Scheme, with an exercise price of £1.36 per share, in accordance with the shareholder approval obtained at the Extraordinary 
General Meeting on 15 April 2009. During the year, no options lapsed, leaving 4,441,950 outstanding. These became exercisable by the relevant Executive Directors 
on 31 January 2014. As a result, 4,208,071 shares were issued to the participants, representing 4,441,950 options that vested under 2009 LTIP Part A, less 233,879 of 
shares equivalent to the exercise price on vesting of £1.36 per share. The share price at the date of vesting was £22.83.

Part B

Part B of the 2009 Long-Term Incentive Plan covers 6,830,000 share options with an exercise price of £6.76. Vesting of the options is in two tranches: 50% on 15 April 
2015 and 50% on 15 April 2016. The options are conditional on continued employment at the relevant vesting date and the satisfaction of the underpin condition that 
Net Assets per Share are at least £9.00 at 15 April 2015 and 15 April 2016. During the year, 30,000 options lapsed on the departure of employees (2013: 180,000) leaving 
6,090,000 options outstanding (2013: 6,120,000).

2011 Long-Term Incentive Plan 
The Company announced in June 2011 as part of a strategic review of the business a long term plan to return approximately £1.7 billion to shareholders over the  
next 10 years. The rules were subsequently amended and approved at the 2012 Annual General Meeting to allow the returns to be made through a combination  
of dividends (£13 per share) and share buy backs (‘distributions’). The cumulative distributions required by the plan on or before the relative milestone dates are set  
out below:

30 September 2015  

30 September 2018  

30 September 2021  

Cumulative distributions

£4.34 per share

£4.33 per share

£4.33 per share

A long term remuneration plan was proposed to support this strategy, the 2011 Long Term Incentive Plan (“2011 LTIP”), which was approved by 

shareholders at the Annual General Meeting on 5 September 2011 and the amendment at the Annual General Meeting on 5 September 2012. The key 

features of the 2011 LTIP are:

–   if the Company returns £1.7 billion to shareholders over a ten year period via a series of dividend payments (£13 per share) and share buy backs by the milestone 

dates referred to above, participants will be entitled to exercise options and receive a number of ordinary shares in the capital of the Company at the end of the ten 
year period.

–   the maximum number of shares capable of being earned by all participants are 19,616,503 shares, being 13% of the fully diluted share capital of the Company at the 

date of approval of the plan.

The fair value of the options granted during that year, determined using the current market pricing model, was £3.17 for options which vest on 30 September 2021. 
The inputs into the current market option pricing model were:

Grant date 

Vesting date 

Share price at grant date (p) 

Exercise price (p) 

Discount rate 

Inputs

5 September 2011

30 September 2021

1,236

nil

6.3%

In 2014, 1,250,000 of the 19,616,503 options over shares were surrendered by one Executive Director. These have now been reallocated to a wider pool of the Group’s 
senior management team. No existing beneficiaries of the Plan received any additional options over shares. All other conditions of the Plan remained unchanged.

The discount rate was determined by calculating the Group’s expected cost of capital over the vesting period at the grant date.

CASH-SETTLED SHARE BASED PAYMENTS
Bonus Banking Plan. 
Under the Bonus Banking Plan, discussed in the Directors’ Remuneration page on page 59, 50% of the balance on the plan account at the end of the financial year is 
deferred in notional shares in the Company. The notional shares can be settled in equity or cash at the discretion of the Company. In prior periods, the plan has been 
accounted for as equity-settled. At the end of year, the plan is expected to be settled in cash, which has been accounted for as a modification to the plan.

The liability is accrued over the vesting period. The income statement is charged with an estimate for the vesting of notional shares awarded subject to service and 
non-market performance conditions. The charge for 2014 was £10.8m (2013: £5.8m), of which £4.6m relates to the modification to cash-settlement.

The total carring amount of liabilities for the Bonus Plan at the end of the year was £11.4m (2013: £1.6m)

Senior Management share appreciation rights 
Certain key members of senior management have been awarded cash bonuses deferred in notional shares in the Company. The notional shares have a contractual life 
of five years after the bonus is allocted, and are settled in cash subject to continued employment by the Company and individual and divisional performance criteria.

The liability is accrued over the vesting period. The income statement is charged with an estimate for the vesting of notional shares awarded subject to service and 
non-market performance conditions. The charge for 2014 was £6.9m (2013: £4.5m).

The total carrying amount of liabilities for share appreciation rights at the end of the year was £13.0m (2013: £6.1m)

PENSIONS
During the year, two principal pension schemes were in place for employees. The Berkeley Group plc Group Personal Pension Plan and the St George PLC Group 
Personal Pension Plan are defined contribution schemes. The assets of these schemes were held in separate trustee administered funds.

The Berkeley Final Salary Plan is a defined benefit scheme which was closed to future accrual with effect from 1 April 2007.

DEFINED CONTRIBUTION PLAN
Contributions amounting to £3.3m (2013: £2.7m) were paid into the defined contribution schemes during the year.

DEFINED BENEFIT PLAN
As at 30 April 2014, the Group operated one defined benefit pension scheme which was closed to future accrual with effect from 1 April 2007. This is a separate trustee 
administered fund holding the pension plan assets to meet long term pension liabilities for some 335 past employees. The level of retirement benefit is principally 
based on salary earned in the last three years of employment prior to leaving active service and is linked to changes in inflation up to retirement.

The Berkeley Final Salary Plan is subject to an independent actuarial valuation at least every three years. The most recently finalised valuation was carried out as at  
1 May 2013 and finalised in December 2013. The method adopted in the 2013 valuation was the projected unit method, which assumed a return on investment both 
prior to and after retirement of 4.00% per annum and pension increases of 3.25% per annum. The market value of the Berkeley Final Salary Plan assets as at 1 May 2013 
was £16.2m and covered 97% of the scheme’s liabilities. Following the finalisation of the 2007 valuation, with effect from 1 July 2008, employer’s required regular 
contributions were reduced to zero. Following the finalisation of the 2013 valuation, the Group agreed with the Trustees of the Scheme to make additional 
contributions to the Scheme of £0.2m for the remainder of the year (1 December 2013 to 30 April 2014) to address the Scheme’s deficit after which required 
contributions were reduced to zero. The Group made total contributions of £0.6m during the year (2013: £0.6m). 

For the purposes of IAS 19, the 2013 valuation was updated for 30 April 2014.

The most significant risks to which the plan exposes the group are:

Inflation risk: A rise in inflation rates will lead to higher plan liabilities as a large proportion of the defined benefit obligation is indexed in line with price inflation. This 
effect will be limited due to caps on inflationary increases to protect the plan against extreme inflation.

Interest rate risk: A decrease in corporate bond yields would result in an increase to plan liabilities although this effect would be partially offset by an increase in the 
value of the plan’s bond holdings.

–   the exercise price of options granted under the 2011 LTIP will be £13 per share less an amount equal to the value of all dividends paid between the date of approval 

of the 2011 LTIP and 30 September 2021, provided the exercise price cannot be less than zero.

Mortality risk: An increase in life expectancy would result in an increase to plan liabilities as a significant proportion of the Pension Schemes’ obligations are to provide 
benefits for the life of the member.

98

99

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  FINANCIALSBERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  FINANCIALSFINANCIALS 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS continued

5 DIRECTORS AND EMPLOYEES CONTINUED
The amounts recognised in the statement of financial position are determined as follows:

The fair value of the assets were as follows:

Present value of defined benefit obligations 

Fair value of plan assets 

Net surplus 

Effect of the asset ceiling 

Net amount recognised on the statement of financial position 

Movement in net defined benefit asset:

2014  
£m  
(14.8) 
16.0 
1.2 
(1.2) 
– 

2013 
£m

(14.6)

16.0

1.4

(1.4)

–

Balance at 1 May 

Included in income statement 

Net interest 

Defined Benefit Obligation 

Fair Value Plan Assets 

Net Defined Benefit Asset

2014 
£m 
 (14.6) 

2013 
£m 

(13.3) 

2014 
£m 
16.0 

2013 
£m 

14.0 

2014 
£m 
1.4 

2013 
£m

0.7

(0.6) 

(0.6) 

0.6 

0.8 

– 

0.2

Included in other comprehensive income 

Remeasurements: 

  Actuarial (loss)/gain arising from: 

– demographic assumptions 

– financial assumptions 

– experience adjustments 

 Return on plan assets 
(excluding interest income)

Other 

Contributions by the employer 

Benefits paid out 

Balance at 30 April 

– 
(0.1) 
0.1 
– 

– 
0.4 
 (14.8) 

– 

(1.1) 

– 

– 

– 

0.4 

(14.6) 

Cumulative actuarial gains and losses recognised in equity:

– 
– 
– 
(0.8) 

0.6 
(0.4) 
16.0 

– 

– 

– 

1.0 

0.6 

(0.4) 

16.0 

Cumulative amounts of losses recognised in the statement of comprehensive income at 1 May 

Net actuarial losses recognised in the year 

Change in the effect of the asset ceiling 

Cumulative amounts of losses recognised in the statement of comprehensive income at 30 April 

– 
(0.1) 
0.1 
(0.8) 

0.6 
– 
1.2 

2014  
£m  
(4.4) 
(0.8) 
0.2 
(5.0) 

–

(1.1)

–

1.0 

0.6

–

1.4

2013 
£m

(3.6)

(0.1)

(0.7)

(4.4)

UK Equities 

Global Equities 

Emerging Market Equities 

Emerging Market Debt 

High Yield Bonds 

Diversified Growth Fund 

Property 

Government Bonds (over 15 years) 

Government Bonds (5 to 15 years) 

Corporate Bonds 

Cash 

Fair value of plan assets 

30 April 2014 
Long-term 
Value 
£m 
0.8 
3.0 
0.7 
1.3 
0.9 
2.9 
1.5 
1.6 
0.8 
2.3 
0.2 
16.0 

30 April 2013

Long-term 
Value 
£m

1.2

2.9

1.2

1.6

0.8

2.9

1.3

0.8

0.8

2.4

0.1

16.0

All equity securities and government bonds have quoted prices in active markets. All government bonds are issued by European governments and are AAA- or 
AA- rated. All other plan assets are not quoted in an active market.

History of asset values

Fair value of scheme assets 

Present value of scheme liabilities 

Net surplus in the plan 

30 April 
2014 
£m 
16.0 
(14.8) 
1.2 

30 April 
2013 
£m 

16.0 

(14.6) 

1.4 

30 April 
2012 
£m 

14.0 

(13.3) 

0.7 

Actuarial assumptions 
The major assumptions used by the actuary for the 30 April 2014 valuation were:

Valuation at: 

Discount rate 

Inflation assumption (RPI) 

Inflation assumption (CPI) 

Rate of increase in pensions in payment post-97 (Pre-97 receive 3% p.a. increases) 

30 April 
2011 
£m 

12.8 

(12.4) 

0.4 

30 April 
2014 
4.30% 
3.40% 
2.50% 
3.40% 

30 April 
2010 
£m 

11.5

(11.4)

0.1

30 April 
2013

4.30%

3.25%

2.50%

3.25%

The mortality assumptions are the standard S1PA CMI_2013_X [1.0%] (2013: S1PA CMI_2009_X [1.0%]) base table for males and females, both adjusted for each 
individual’s year of birth to allow for future improvements in mortality rates. The life expectancy of male and female pensioners (now aged 65) retiring at age 65 on the 
balance sheet date is 22.0 years and 24.2 years respectively (2013: 22.0 and 24.0). The life expectancy of male and female deferred pensioners (now aged 50) retiring at 
age 65 after the balance sheet date is 23.0 years and 25.3 years respectively (2013: 23.0 and 25.2).

Sensitivity Analysis 
The calculation of the defined benefit obligation is sensitive to the assumptions set out above. The following table summarises how the impact on the defined benefit 
obligation at the end of the reporting period would have increased as a result of a change in the respective assumptions.

Discount rate 

Rate of inflation 

Rate of mortality 

Change in  
Assumption 

Change in defined 
benefit obligation

-0.25% p.a 

+0.25% p.a 

+ 1 year 

+4.2%

+2.9%

+2.6%

These calculations provide an approximate guide to the sensitivity of results and may not be as accurate as a full valuation carried out on these assumptions. In 
practice, changes in some of the assumptions are correlated and so each assumption change is unlikely to occur in isolation, as shown above.

Funding 
The Group expects to pay £0.6m in contributions to its defined benefit plan in the year ending 30 April 2015 (i.e. the next annual reporting period). 

100

101

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  FINANCIALSBERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  FINANCIALSFINANCIALS 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS continued

6 TAXATION
The tax charge for the year is as follows:

Current tax

UK corporation tax payable 

Adjustments in respect of previous years 

Deferred tax at 23% (note 19) (2013: 24%) 

Adjustment in respect of change of tax rate from 23% to 21%/20% (note 19) (2013: 24% to 23%) 

Tax on items recognised directly in other comprehensive income is as follows:

Deferred tax on actuarial loss recognised in the pension scheme (note 19) 

Tax on items recognised directly in equity is as follows:

Deferred tax in respect of employee share schemes (note 19) 

Current tax in respect of employee share schemes (note 19) 

2014  
£m  

(94.3) 
(4.0) 
(98.3) 
16.5 
(5.3) 
(87.1) 

2014  
£m  
0.1 

2014  
£m  
17.3 
(23.1) 
(5.8) 

The tax charge assessed for the year differs from the standard rate of UK corporation tax of 22.84% (2013: 23.92%). The differences are explained below:

Profit before tax 

Tax on profit at standard UK corporation tax rate 

Effects of: 

Expenses not deductible for tax purposes 

Tax effect of share of results of joint ventures 

Adjustments in respect of previous periods – current tax 

Adjustments in respect of deferred tax change of rate from 23% to 21%/20% (2013: 24% to 23%) 

Utilisation of losses 

Other 

Tax charge  

2014  
£m  
380.0 
86.8 

0.5 
0.1 
4.0 
5.3 
(0.8) 
(8.8) 
87.1 

2013 
£m

(77.7)

7.0

(70.7)

10.8

(1.1)

(61.0)

2013 
£m

0.2

2013 
£m

21.4

–

21.4

2013 
£m

270.7

64.7

0.9

0.4

(7.0)

1.1

–

0.9

61.0

The statutory tax rate in 2014 was at 22.84% (11 months at 23%, 1 month at 21%)

The adjustments in respect of previous years includes items such as contaminated land relief, research and development relief and other timing differences that are 
not individually significant and have not therefore been separately disclosed.

The other adjustment predominantly relates to the deferred tax effect of the external sale of certain properties from subsidiaries incorporated in overseas tax 
jurisdictions with different rates to the UK on which tax has been paid in previous years (£8.2m).

7 EARNINGS PER ORDINARY SHARE
Basic earnings per ordinary share is calculated as profit for the financial year attributable to shareholders of the Group divided by the weighted average number of 
shares in issue during the year.

Profit attributable to shareholders (£m) 

Weighted average number of shares (m) 

Basic earnings per ordinary share (p) 

2014 
292.9 
132.1 
221.8 

2013

209.7

131.0

160.0

For diluted earnings per ordinary share, the weighted average number of shares in issue is adjusted to assume the conversion of all potentially dilutive ordinary shares. 
At 30 April 2014, the Group had three (2013: four) categories of potentially dilutive ordinary shares: 5.9 million £6.76 share options under the 2009 LTIP Part B and  
19.6 million £nil share options under the 2011 LTIP. 4.4 million share options vested on 31 January 2014 under the 2009 LTIP Part A scheme.

A calculation is done to determine the number of shares that could have been acquired at fair value based on the aggregate of the exercise price of each share option 
and the fair value of future services to be supplied to the Group which is the unamortised share-based payments charge. The difference between the number of shares 
that could have been acquired at fair value and the total number of options is used in the diluted earnings per share calculation. 

Profit used to determine diluted EPS (£m) 

Weighted average number of shares (m)  

Adjustments for:  

Share options – 2009 LTIP Part A (m)  

Share options – 2009 LTIP Part B (m)  

Share options – 2011 LTIP (m) 

Bonus plan shares (m)  

Shares used to determine diluted EPS (m)  

Diluted earnings per ordinary share (p)  

8 INTANGIBLE ASSETS

Cost

At 1 May 2013 and 30 April 2014 

Accumulated impairment 

At 1 May 2013 and at 30 April 2014 

Net book value 

At 1 May 2013 and at 30 April 2014 

Cost

At 1 May 2012 and 30 April 2013 

Accumulated impairment 

At 1 May 2012 and at 30 April 2013 

Net book value

At 1 May 2012 and at 30 April 2013 

2014 
292.9 
132.1 

3.0 
4.0 
16.4 
– 
155.5 
188.4 

2013

209.7

131.0

3.6

2.6

11.9

0.3

149.4

140.3

Goodwill 
£m 

17.2

–

17.2

17.2

–

17.2

The goodwill balance relates solely to the acquisition of the 50% of the ordinary share capital of St James Group Limited, completed on 7 November 2006, that was 
not already owned by the Group. The goodwill balance is tested annually for impairment. The recoverable amount has been determined on the basis of the value in 
use of the business using the current five year pre-tax forecasts. Key assumptions are as follows:

(i) Cash flows beyond a five year period are not extrapolated;

(ii) A pre-tax discount rate of 13.21% (2013: 11.62%) based on the Group’s weighted average cost of capital.

The Directors have identified no reasonably possible change in a key assumption which would give rise to an impairment charge.

102

103

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  FINANCIALSBERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  FINANCIALSFINANCIALS 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS continued

9 PROPERTY, PLANT AND EQUIPMENT AND INVESTMENT PROPERTY

Property, plant and equipment

Cost 

At 1 May 2013 

Additions 

Disposals 

At 30 April 2014 
Accumulated Depreciation

At 1 May 2013 

Charge for the year  

Disposals 

At 30 April 2014 
Net book value

At 1 May 2013 

At 30 April 2014 

Cost

At 1 May 2012 

Additions 

Disposals 

Transfer to held for sale (Note 15) 

At 30 April 2013 

Accumulated Depreciation

At 1 May 2012 

Charge for the year  

Disposals 

Transfer to held for sale (Note 15) 

At 30 April 2013 

Net book value

At 1 May 2012 

At 30 April 2013 

Freehold 
property 
£m 

Fixtures and 
fittings 
£m 

Motor 
vehicles 
£m 

11.1 

5.2 

– 

16.3 

0.5 

0.2 

– 

0.7 

10.6 

15.6 

8.8 

2.2 

(5.0) 

6.0 

5.3 

1.1 

(4.1) 

2.3 

3.5 

3.7 

3.5 

1.5 

(1.0) 

4.0 

1.3 

0.6 

(0.6) 

1.3 

2.2 

2.7 

Total 
£m 

23.4 

8.9 

(6.0) 

26.3 

7.1 

1.9 

(4.7) 

4.3 

16.3 

22.0 

Property, plant and equipment

Freehold 
property 
£m 

Fixtures and 
fittings 
£m 

Motor 
vehicles 
£m 

8.0 

3.1 

– 

– 

11.1 

0.3 

0.2 

– 

– 

0.5 

7.7 

10.6 

6.8 

2.6 

(0.6) 

– 

8.8 

4.8 

1.1 

(0.6) 

– 

5.3 

2.0 

3.5 

2.9 

0.9 

(0.3) 

– 

3.5 

1.0 

0.5 

(0.2) 

– 

1.3 

1.9 

2.2 

Total 
£m 

17.7 

6.6 

(0.9) 

– 

23.4 

6.1 

1.8 

(0.8) 

– 

7.1 

11.6 

16.3 

 Investment 
 properties 
£m 

27.4

–

(19.9)

7.5

0.9

0.1

(0.7)

0.3

26.5

7.2

 Investment 
 properties 
£m 

84.6

29.5

(9.2)

(77.5)

27.4

1.1

1.7

(0.2)

(1.7)

0.9

83.5

26.5

Additions to investment property in 2013 represented the value at cost of completed properties transferred from the Group’s inventory to be held for rental purposes. 
The market value of the properties held at 30 April 2014 is £10.3m (30 April 2013: £43.9m) as determined by the Directors taking into account all relevant factors 
including their nature and location. No independent valuation was undertaken.

10 INVESTMENTS

Unlisted shares at cost 

Loans 

Share of post-acquisition reserves 

Elimination of profit on transfer of inventory to joint ventures 

Details of the principal joint ventures are provided in note 29.

The movement on the investment in joint ventures during the year is as follows:

At 1 May 

Profit/(loss) after tax for the year 

Net increase/(decrease) in loans to joint ventures 

At 30 April 

Net increase/(decrease) in loans to joint ventures includes movements in unlisted shares at cost.

The Group’s share of joint ventures’ net assets, income and expenses is made up as follows:

Current assets 

Current liabilities 

Non-current liabilities 

Revenue 

Costs 

Operating profit 

Interest charges 

Profit/(loss) before taxation 

Tax charge 

Share of post tax profit/(loss) of joint ventures 

11 OTHER INVESTMENTS
Other investments comprise available-for-sale financial assets.

At 1 May 

Additions 

Fair value adjustment taken through other comprehensive income 

At 30 April 

2014 
£m 
12.1 
41.9 
7.9 
(0.5) 
61.4 

2014 
£m 
44.1 
12.1 
5.2  
61.4 

2014 
£m 
180.4 
(82.5) 
(36.5) 
61.4 

125.6 
(112.1) 
13.5 
(1.2) 
12.3 
(0.2) 
12.1 

2014 
£m 
– 
10.0 
1.0 
11.0 

2013 
£m

13.7

35.1

(4.2)

(0.5)

44.1

2013 
£m

46.5

(1.3)

(1.1)

44.1

2013 
£m

161.9

(86.4)

(31.4)

44.1

9.4

(8.7)

0.7

(1.9)

(1.2)

(0.1)

(1.3)

2013 
£m

–

–

–

–

During the year, the Group sold 534 rental properties to a fund owned and controlled by M&G Investments (Note 15). Following this sale, as agreed with  
M&G Investments, the Group invested £10.0 million into the fund to acquire 100,000 units at an average price of £100 per unit. As at 30 April 2014, the Group held 
100,000 units. In accordance with IFRS 7 ‘Financial Instruments: Disclosures’, these financial assets have been classified as Level 2 within the fair value hierarchy. Level 2 
fair value measurements are those that are derived from inputs other than quoted prices included within level 1 that are observable for the asset (that is, as prices) or 
indirectly (that is, derived from prices). 

On 30 April 2014, based on inputs other than quoted prices, the units had a market value of £11.0m. A gain of £1.0m has been recognised in the consolidated 
statement of comprehensive income for the year ended 30 April 2014.

Further disclosures relating to financial assets are set out in note 26.

104

105

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  FINANCIALSBERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  FINANCIALSFINANCIALS 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS continued

12 INVENTORIES

Land not under development 

Work in progress 

Completed units 

13 TRADE AND OTHER RECEIVABLES

Trade receivables 

Other receivables 

Prepayments and accrued income 

Further disclosures relating to trade receivables are set out in note 26.

14 CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS

Cash and cash equivalents 

2014 
£m 
492.4 
1,966.4 
22.4 
2,481.2 

2014 
£m 
134.0 
15.3 
9.7 
159.0 

2014 
£m 
130.2 

2013 
£m

310.0

1,711.7

 45.0

 2,066.7

2013 
£m

105.9

11.8

9.1

126.8

2013 
£m

66.8

15 NON-CURRENT ASSETS HELD FOR SALE
During the year, on 5 June 2013, Berkeley sold 534 Homes and Community Agency funded residential properties within its rental fund to a fund owned and controlled 
by M&G Investments for £105.4 million, which was recognised as revenue. In the prior year, these properties were held in the balance sheet as Non-current assets held 
for sale of £75.8 million.

16 BORROWINGS

Current

Bank loans 

Other loans 

Further disclosures relating to current and non-current loans are set out in note 26.

17 TRADE AND OTHER PAYABLES

Current

Trade payables 

Deposits and on account contract receipts 

Loans from joint ventures 

Other taxes and social security 

Accruals and deferred income 

Non-current

Trade payables 

Total trade and other payables 

2014 
£m 

(1.0)  
– 
(1.0) 

2014 
£m 

(346.7) 
(741.6) 
(0.1) 
(39.4) 
(90.8) 
(1,218.6) 

(148.6) 
(1,367.2) 

2013 
£m

(4.7)

(17.4)

(22.1)

2013 
£m

(381.1)

(426.1)

(0.1)

(26.6)

(72.0)

(905.9)

(115.5)

(1,021.4)

All amounts included above are unsecured. The total of £39.4m (2013: £26.6m) for other taxes and social security includes £29.5m (2013: £22.0m) for Employer’s 
National Insurance provision in respect of share-based payments.

Further disclosures relating to current trade and non-current trade payables are set out in note 26.

18 PROVISIONS FOR OTHER LIABILITIES AND CHARGES

At 1 May 2013 

Utilised 

Released 

Charged to the income statement 

At 30 April 2014 

At 1 May 2012 

Reclassified from accruals 

Utilised 

Released 

Charged to the income statement 

At 30 April 2013 

Analysis of total provisions:

Non-current 

Current 

Total 

a) Construction liabilities

Construction 
liabilities 
£m 

(23.6) 

1.6 

– 

(31.2) 

(53.2) 

Construction 
liabilities 
£m 

– 

(16.5) 

– 

6.6 

(13.7) 

(23.6) 

Other 
£m 

(5.4) 

0.9 

1.2 

(0.6) 

(3.9) 

Other 
£m 

– 

(7.3) 

0.7 

1.2 

– 

(5.4) 

2014 
£m 
48.5 
8.6 
57.1 

Total 
£m

(29.0)

2.5

1.2

(31.8)

(57.1)

Total 
£m

–

(23.8)

0.7

7.8

(13.7)

(29.0)

2013 
£m

27.9

1.1

29.0

The Group holds provisions for a best estimate of certain post-completion development obligations in respect of the construction of its portfolio of complex 
mixed-use developments which are expected to be incurred in the ordinary course of business, based on historic experience, but which are uncertain in terms of 
timing and quantum.

b) Other

Other provisions include onerous lease provisions for properties leased by the Group and provisions for the Group’s exposure to specific estate liabilities on historic 
sites developed by the Group.

19 DEFERRED TAX
The movement on the deferred tax account is as follows:

At 1 May 2013 

Transfer to corporation tax receivable 

(Charged)/credited to the income statement at 23% (note 6)    

Adjustment in respect of change of tax rate from 23% to 21%/20% (note 6) 

(Charged)/credited to the income statement in year 

Credited to equity at 23% 

Adjustment in respect of change of tax rate from 23% to 21%/20% 

Realisation of deferred tax asset on vesting of employee share scheme 

Credited to equity in year (note 6) 

At 30 April 2014 

 Accelerated 
 capital 
 allowances 
 £m 

0.3 

 – 

 – 

– 

–  

– 

– 

 – 

– 

 0.3 

 Retirement 
 benefit 
 obligation 
 £m 

short-term 
timing 
differences 
£m 

– 

– 

(0.1) 

– 

(0.1) 

 0.1 

 – 

 – 

 0.1 

 – 

56.4 

(1.1) 

16.6 

(5.3) 

11.3 

21.2 

(3.9) 

(23.1) 

(5.8) 

60.8 

 Total 
 £m

56.7

(1.1)

16.5

(5.3)

11.2

21.3

(3.9)

(23.1)

(5.7)

61.1

106

107

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  FINANCIALSBERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  FINANCIALSFINANCIALS 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS continued

19 DEFERRED TAX CONTINUED

 Accelerated 
 capital 
 allowances 
 £m 

 Retirement 
 benefit 
 obligation 
 £m 

Short-term 
timing 
differences 
£m 

At 1 May 2012 

Transfer from corporation tax receivable 

(Charged)/credited to the income statement at 24% (note 6)   

Adjustment in respect of change of tax rate from 24% to 23% (note 6) 

(Charged)/credited to the income statement in year 

Credited to equity at 24% 

Adjustment in respect of change of tax rate from 24% to 23%  

Credited to equity in year (note 6) 

At 30 April 2013 

 0.4 

– 

(0.1) 

– 

(0.1) 

– 

– 

– 

0.3 

 – 

– 

(0.2) 

– 

(0.2) 

0.2 

– 

0.2 

– 

24.6 

0.4 

11.1 

(1.1) 

10.0 

22.7 

(1.3) 

21.4 

56.4 

 Total 
 £m

25.0

0.4

10.8

(1.1)

9.7

22.9

(1.3)

 21.6

56.7

Deferred tax is calculated in full on temporary differences under the liability method using a tax rate of 21% or 20% (2013: 23%). There is no unprovided deferred tax 
(2013: nil).

All of the deferred tax assets were available for offset against deferred tax liabilities and hence the net deferred tax asset at 30 April 2014 was £61.1m (2013: £56.7m).

Deferred tax assets of £58.3m (2013: £33.9m) are expected to be recovered after more than one year.

The Autumn Statement (December 2013) and the draft Finance Bill 2014 included legislation to reduce the main rate of corporation tax to 21% for the financial year 
commencing 1 April 2014 and 20% for the financial year commencing 1 April 2015. The change had been substantively enacted at the balance sheet date and, 
therefore, has been reflected in these financial statements.

The deferred tax credited to equity during the year was as follows:

Deferred tax on actuarial loss recognised in the pension scheme (note 6) 

Deferred tax in respect of employee share schemes (note 6) 

Movement in the year 

Cumulative deferred tax credited to equity at 1 May 

Cumulative deferred tax credited to equity at 30 April 

20 SHARE CAPITAL AND SHARE PREMIUM
The movements on allotted and fully paid share capital for the Company in the year were as follows:

Issued 

At start of year 

Issued in year 

At end of year 

  Ordinary shares 
2013 
 No ‘000 

2014 
No ‘000 

134,857 
 500 
135,357 

134,857 

– 

134,857 

2014 
£m 

 6.7 
 0.1 
6.8 

Share Capital 
2013 
£m 

 6.7 

– 

6.7 

2014  
£m  
0.1 
(5.8) 
(5.7) 
32.7 
27.0 

2013 
 £m

 0.2

 21.4

 21.6

 11.1

 32.7

Share Premium 
2013 
£m

49.3

–

49.3

2014 
£m 

 49.3 
– 
49.3 

Each ordinary share of 5p is a voting share in the capital of the Company, is entitled to participate in the profits of the Company and on a winding-up is entitled to 
participate in the assets of the Company.

On 29 January 2014, the company transferred 3.6 million shares (2013: nil), held as ‘treasury shares’, to the Employee Benefit Trust.

On 31 January 2014, 0.5 million ordinary shares (2013: nil) were allotted and issued to the Employee Benefit Trust.

On 31 January 2014, 4.2 million ordinary shares (2013: nil) were transferred from the Employee Benefit Trust to Executive Directors to satisfy the exercise of options 
under the 2009 Long Term Incentive Plan Part A.

At 30 April 2014 there were no shares held as ‘treasury shares’ (2013: 3.6m). 

At 30 April 2014 there were 0.1m shares held in trust (2013: 0.2m). The market value of these shares at 30 April 2014 was £2.4m (2013: £4.9m).

21 RESERVES
The movement in reserves is set out in the Consolidated Statement of Changes in Equity on page 91.

OTHER RESERVE
The other reserve of negative £961.3m (2013: negative £961.3m) arose from the application of merger accounting principles to the financial statements on 
implementation of the capital reorganisation of the Group, incorporating a Scheme of Arrangement, in the year ended 30 April 2005.

REVALUATION RESERVE
The revaluation reserve consists of balances in relation to two separate transactions. 

The first element arose following the acquisition on 7 November 2006 of the 50% of the ordinary share capital of St James Group Limited not already owned.  
A revaluation reserve of £20,297,000 was originally created in accordance with IFRS 3 through fair value adjustments to the 50% of the net assets of St James Group 
Limited owned by the Group prior to 7 November 2006. Transfers of £54,000 in the year (2013: £929,000) out of retained earnings was recognised as the associated  
fair value adjustments. At 30 April 2014 the balance in the revaluation reserve relating to the acquisition of St James Group Limited is £3,877,000 (2013: £3,823,000).

The second element arose in 2010 following the acquisition on 23 July 2009 of the shares owned by Saad Investments Company Limited and the outstanding 
shareholder loans in five joint ventures which became fully owned subsidiaries from this date. A revaluation reserve of £560,000 was created in accordance with  
IFRS 3 through fair value adjustments to the 50% of the net assets of the joint ventures owned by the Group prior to 23 July 2009. Transfers of £36,000 in the year  
(2013: £304,000) out of retained earnings were recognised as the associated fair value adjustments. At 30 April 2014 the balance in the revaluation reserve relating to 
the acquisition of the five entities that were previously joint ventures with Saad Investments Company Limited is £213,000 (2013: £177,000).

CAPITAL REDEMPTION RESERVE
The capital redemption reserve was created to maintain the capital of the Company following the redemption of the B Shares associated with the Scheme of 
Arrangement created in 2004 which completed on 10 September 2009 with the re-designation of the unissued B shares as ordinary shares.

RETAINED EARNINGS
The Company and the Company’s Employee Benefit Trust acquired none (2013: none) of its own shares through purchases on the London Stock Exchange in the year. 

22 DIVIDENDS PER SHARE
The dividends paid in 2014 were a total of £195.2 million, £77.2 million in September 2013 (59 pence per share) and £118.0 million in January 2014 (90 pence per share) 
(2013: £19.7 million, 15 pence per share). A further interim dividend of £121.7 million (90 pence per share) has been declared for payment on 26 September 2014. 
These financial statements do not reflect this further interim dividend. 

23 CONTINGENT LIABILITIES 
The Group has guaranteed road and performance agreements in the ordinary course of business of £15.0m (2013: £15.7m).

24 OPERATING LEASES – MINIMUM LEASE PAYMENTS
The total future aggregate minimum lease payments of the Group under non-cancellable operating leases are set out below:

Amounts due within:

Within one year 

Between one and five years 

After five years 

2014 
£m 

1.9 
4.4 
2.4 
8.7 

2013 
£m

1.5

3.9

3.0

8.4

108

109

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  FINANCIALSBERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  FINANCIALSFINANCIALS 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS continued

25 NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED CASH FLOW STATEMENT
Reconciliation of profit after taxation for the year to cash generated from operations:

FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS: FINANCIAL ASSETS
The Group’s financial assets can be summarised as follows:

Profit after taxation for the year 

Adjustments for:

– Taxation 

– Depreciation 

– Loss on sale of fixed assets 

– Profit on sale of investment properties 

– Finance income 

– Finance costs 

– Share of results of joint ventures after tax 

– Non-cash charge in respect of share-based payments 

Changes in working capital:

– Increase in inventories 

– Increase in trade and other receivables 

– Increase in trade and other payables 

– Decrease in employee benefit obligations 

Cash generated from operations 

Reconciliation of net cash flow to net cash:

Net increase in cash and cash equivalents, including bank overdraft 

Net cash outflow from decrease in borrowings 

Movement in net cash/(debt) in the year 

Opening net cash/(debt) 

Closing net cash 

Net cash:

As at 30 April 

Cash and cash equivalents 

Current borrowings  

Net cash 

2014 
£m 
292.9 

87.1 
2.0 
0.7 
(43.2) 
(3.4) 
10.3 
(12.1) 
3.3 

(414.5) 
(33.6) 
370.8 
(0.6) 
259.7 

2014 
£m 
63.4 
21.1 
84.5 
44.7 
129.2 

2014 
£m 
130.2 
(1.0) 
129.2 

2013 
£m

209.7

61.0

3.5

–

(3.6)

(1.5)

9.6

1.3

11.8

(244.5)

(12.2)

154.5

(0.6)

189.0

2013 
£m

64.1

38.5

102.6

(57.9)

44.7

2013 
£m

66.8

(22.1)

44.7

26 CAPITAL MANAGEMENT, FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS AND FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT
The Group finances its operations by a combination of shareholders’ funds, working capital and, where appropriate, borrowings. The Group’s objective when 
managing capital is to maintain an appropriate capital structure in the business to allow management to focus on creating sustainable long-term value for its 
shareholders, with flexibility to take advantage of opportunities as they arise in the short and medium term. This allows the Group to take advantage of prevailing 
market conditions by investing in land and work in progress at the right point in the cycle or delivering returns to shareholders through dividends or share buy backs. 
Last year the Group put in place a long-term strategic plan to see £13 per share returned to shareholders over the next 10 years. This plan, reported in more detail in 
the Trading and Financial Review on pages 38 to 42, ensures there is sufficient working capital retained in the business to continue investing selectively in new land 
opportunities as they arise.

The Group monitors capital levels principally by monitoring net cash/debt levels, cash flow forecasts and return on average capital employed. The Group considers 
capital employed to be net assets adjusted for net cash/debt. Capital employed at 30 April 2014 was £1,312.1m (2013: £1,277.7m). The increase in capital employed in 
the year of £34.4m reflects further investment in land and work in progress during the year.

The Group’s financial instruments comprise financial assets being: trade receivables and cash and cash equivalents and financial liabilities being: bank loans, trade 
payables, deposits and on account receipts, loans from joint ventures and accruals. Cash and cash equivalents and borrowings are the principal financial instruments 
used to finance the business. The other financial instruments highlighted arise in the ordinary course of business.

As all of the operations carried out by the Group are in sterling there is no direct currency risk, and therefore the Group’s main financial risks are primarily:

– liquidity risk – the risk that suitable funding for the Group’s activities may not be available;

– market interest rate risk – the risk that Group financing activities are adversely affected by fluctuation in market interest rates; and

– credit risk – the risk that a counterparty will default on their contractual obligations resulting in a loss to the Group.

Current

Trade receivables 

Cash and cash equivalents 

Non-current

Available-for-sale financial assets 

Total financial assets 

2014 
£m 

134.0 
130.2 
264.2 

11.0 
11.0 
275.2 

2013 
£m

105.9

66.8

172.7

–

–

172.7

Trade receivables and available-for-sale financial assets are non-interest bearing. Of the current trade receivables balance of £134.0m (30 April 2013: £105.9m), £127.3m 
(30 April 2013: £87.8m) was not past due, with £6.7m being 0–30 days past due (30 April 2013: £6.6m, 0–30 days past due, £5.8m, 31 to 60 days, £5.7m over 60 days). 

Cash and cash equivalents are short-term deposits held at either floating rates linked to LIBOR or fixed rates.

The table below analyses financial instruments carried at fair value, by valuation method. The different levels have been defined as follows:

– Quoted prices (unadjusted) in active markets for identical assets or liabilities (level 1).

–  Inputs other than quoted prices included within level 1 that are observable for the asset or liability, either directly (that is, as prices) or indirectly (that is, derived from 

prices) (level 2).

– Inputs for the asset or liability that are not based on observable market data (that is, unobservable inputs) (level 3).

The following table presents the group’s assets that are measured at fair value at 30 April 2014.

Assets 

Available-for-sale financial assets 

Total assets 

Notes 

11 

– 

Level 1 
£m 

– 

11.0 

Level 2 
£m 

11.0 

– 

The available-for-sale financial asset was acquired in the year (Note 11) therefore there is no prior year comparative.

FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS: FINANCIAL LIABILITIES
The Group’s financial liabilities can be summarised as follows:

Current

Bank loans 

Trade payables 

Deposits and on account contract receipts 

Loans from joint ventures 

Accruals and deferred income 

Other loans 

Non-current

Trade payables 

Total financial liabilities 

All amounts included above are unsecured.

Level 3 
£m 

– 

11.0 

2014  
£m  

(1.0) 
(346.7) 
(741.6) 
(0.1) 
(90.8) 
– 
(1,180.2) 

(148.6) 
(148.6) 
(1,328.8) 

Total 
£m

11.0

2013 
 £m

(4.7)

(381.1)

(426.1)

(0.1)

(72.0)

(17.4)

(901.4)

(115.5)

(115.5)

(1,016.9)

Current bank loans have term expiry dates within twelve months of the balance sheet date and are held at floating interest rates linked to LIBOR. Trade payables and 
other current liabilities are non-interest bearing. 

In the prior year, other loans represented a loan from the Homes and Communities Agency on which interest was payable based on a proportionate share of the net 
rental income arising from the properties to which the loan related. This loan was repaid following completion of the sale of 534 HCA funded residential properties on 
5 June 2014 (see note 15).

110

111

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  FINANCIALSBERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  FINANCIALSFINANCIALS 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS continued

26 CAPITAL MANAGEMENT, FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS AND FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT CONTINUED
The maturity profile of the Group’s non-current financial liabilities, all of which are held at amortised cost, is as follows:

COMMITTED BORROWING FACILITIES
The Group has committed borrowing facilities as follows:

In more than one year but not more than two years 

In more than two years but not more than five years 

In more than five years 

2014  
£m  
(54.3) 
(93.3) 
 (1.0) 
(148.6) 

2013 
 £m

(27.7)

(87.8)

– 

(115.5)

Revolving credit facility one 
Revolving credit facility two 

Available 
£m 

Drawn 
£m 

275 

250 

525 

– 

– 

– 

2014 
Undrawn  Termination 
date 
May-18 
Apr-18 

275 

250 

 £m 

525 

Available 
£m 

Drawn 
£m 

275 

250 

525 

– 

– 

– 

2013 
Undrawn  Termination 
date 

£m 

May-17

Apr-18

275 

250 

525 

The carrying amounts of the Group’s financial assets and financial liabilities approximate to fair value. 

Current trade receivables and current trade and other payables approximate to their fair value as the transactions which give rise to these balances arise in the normal 
course of trade and, where relevant, with industry standard payment terms and have a short period to maturity (less than one year). 

Current trade receivables include £16.2m relating to amounts owed by St Edward Homes Limited in respect of the inventory sold by the Group in 2009 (Note 27). This 
is held at its discounted present value (calculated by discounting expected future cash flows at prevailing interest rates and yields as appropriate). The discount rate 
applied reflects the nominal, risk-free pre-tax rate at the balance sheet date, applied to the maturity profile. At 30 April 2014 a rate of 1.08% was applied (2013: 0.43%).

Non-current trade payables comprise long-term land payables, which are held at their discounted present value (calculated by discounting expected future cash flows 
at prevailing interest rates and yields as appropriate). The discount rate applied reflects the nominal, risk-free pre-tax rate at the balance sheet date, applied to the 
maturity profile of the individual land creditors within the total. At 30 April 2014 a rate of 1.08% was applied (2013: 0.43%). Non-current loans approximate to fair value 
as they are held at variable market interest rates linked to LIBOR.

LIQUIDITY RISK
This is the risk that suitable funding for the Group’s activities may not be available. Group management addresses this risk through review of rolling cash flow forecasts 
throughout the year to assess and monitor the current and forecast availability of funding, and to ensure sufficient headroom against facility limits and compliance with 
banking covenants. The committed borrowing facilities are set out below.

At 30 April 2014 the total drawn down balance across both facilities was £nil (2013: £nil). In addition, at 30 April 2014 there were bank bonds in issue of £0.2m  
(2013: £0.2m).

A one year extension was granted on 24 May 2013 for revolving credit facility one, which extended the maturity date on this facility until May 2018.

The revolving credit facilities are secured by debentures provided by certain Group holding companies over their assets. The facility agreement contains financial 
covenants, which is normal for such agreements, all of which the Group is in compliance with. 

27 RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS
The Group has entered into the following related party transactions:

TRANSACTIONS WITH DIRECTORS
In terms of new transactions in the 2014 financial year:

i)    Mr A W Pidgley paid £440,052 to Berkeley Homes plc for works carried out at his home under the Group’s own build scheme (2013: Mr A W Pidgley £20,156). This is 
a scheme whereby eligible employees may enter into an arrangement, at commercial rates, with the Group for the construction or renovation of their own home. 
There were no balances outstanding at the year end.

The contractual undiscounted maturity profile of the Group’s financial liabilities, included at their carrying value in the preceding tables, is as follows:

ii)    Mr G Fry, a Director of the Company, contracted to purchase an apartment at Sovereign Court, Hammersmith, London for £819,950 on 10 September 2013 from  

In less than one year 

In more than one year but not more than two years 

In more than two years but not more than five years 

In more than five years 

2014  
£m  
(1,183.1) 
(55.0) 
(96.0) 
(1.0) 
(1,335.1) 

2013 
 £m

(901.4)

(27.9)

(89.0)

–

(1,018.3)

MARKET INTEREST RATE RISK
The Group’s cash and cash equivalents and bank loans expose the Group to cash flow interest rate risk.

The Group’s rolling cash flow forecasts incorporate appropriate interest assumptions, and management carefully assesses expected activity levels and associated 
funding requirements in the prevailing and forecast interest rate environment to ensure that this risk is managed. 

If interest rates on the Group’s cash/debt balances had been 50 basis points higher throughout the year ended 30 April 2014, profit after tax for the year would have 
been £483,000 (2013: £26,000 higher). This calculation is based on the monthly closing net cash/debt balance throughout the year. A 50 basis point increase in interest 
rate represents management’s assessment of a reasonably possible change for the year ended 30 April 2014. 

CREDIT RISK
The Group’s exposure to credit risk encompasses the financial assets being: trade receivables and cash and cash equivalents.

Trade receivables are spread across a wide number of customers, with no significant concentration of credit risk in one area. There has been no impairment of  
trade receivables during the year (2013: £nil), nor are there any provisions held against trade receivables (2013: £nil), and no trade receivables are past their due  
date (2013: £nil).

The credit risk on cash and cash equivalents is limited because counterparties are leading international banks with long-term A credit-ratings assigned by international 
credit agencies.

St George West London Limited, a wholly owned subsidiary of the Company. Mr Fry is also a Director of St George West London Limited. 

The agreement between St George West London Limited and Mr Fry is a standard form sale and purchase agreement used by the Company on its development, 
save that it is conditional upon the agreement of shareholders. 

As this transaction is in excess of £100,000, it constitutes a substantial property transaction with a Director of the Company under sections 190 and 191 of the 
Companies Act 2006 and is therefore conditional on the approval of shareholders, which will be sought at the Annual General Meeting on 1 September 2014. 

Mr Fry paid a ten per cent deposit on exchange of contracts which will only be returned to him in the event that shareholders do not approve the transaction.

In terms of transactions previously disclosed, the purchases of an apartment by Mr G Fry at Chelsea Creek for £725,000 in 2012, by Mr A W Pidgley at Ebury Square for 
£10,500,000 in 2013 and by Mr R C Perrins at 190 Strand for £2,100,000 in 2013 all received shareholder approval. As at 30 April 2014, any contractual deposits due to 
date had been paid to the Group, there were no current balances outstanding and the properties were still under construction and so the sales had not yet 
completed.

TRANSACTIONS WITH JOINT VENTURES
During the financial year there were no transactions with joint ventures other than movements in loans. In 2009 inventory was sold to St Edward Homes Limited for 
£17,411,000 being the share of the transaction attributable to the other venturer in the joint venture. At 30 April 2014 an amount of £16,219,000 was outstanding and 
included within trade receivables (2013: £21,319,000). Loans with joint ventures are disclosed in note 10.

28 EVENTS AFTER THE REPORTING PERIOD
On 30 May 2014, the Group exchanged contracts for the sale of a portfolio of ground rent assets for £99.8 million. The sale is expected to give rise to a non-recurring 
profit on disposal of approximately £80 million after transaction costs in the year ending 30 April 2015.

112

113

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  FINANCIALSBERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  FINANCIALSFINANCIALS 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS continued

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  FINANCIALS

COMPANY BALANCE SHEET

29 SUBSIDIARIES AND JOINT VENTURES
(a) Subsidiaries

At 30 April 2014 the Company had the following principal subsidiary undertakings which have all been consolidated, are registered and operate in England and Wales, 
are all 100% owned and for which 100% of voting rights are held except where stated:

Residential led mixed-use development and ancillary activities

Berkeley Commercial Developments Limited 

Berkeley First Limited (1) 

Berkeley Homes (Capital) plc (1) 

Berkeley Homes (Carmelite) Limited 

Berkeley Homes (Central London) Limited (1) 

Berkeley Homes (East Thames) Limited (1) 

Berkeley Homes (Eastern Counties) Limited (1) 

Berkeley Homes (Eastern) Limited (1) 

Berkeley Homes (Fleet) Limited 

Berkeley Homes (Hampshire) Limited (1) 

Berkeley Homes (North East London) Limited (1) 

Berkeley Homes (Oxford & Chiltern) Limited (1) 

Berkeley Homes (PCL) Limited 

Berkeley Homes (South East London) Limited (1) 

Berkeley Homes (Southern) Limited (1) 

Berkeley Homes (Three Valleys) Limited (1) 

Berkeley Homes (Urban Renaissance) Limited (1) 

Berkeley Homes (West London) Limited (1) 

(1) Agency companies of Berkeley Homes plc

(2) Agency companies of St George PLC

Berkeley Homes Public Limited Company

Berkeley Partnership Homes Limited (1)

Berkeley Ryewood Limited

Berkeley Strategic Land Limited

BH (City Forum) Limited

St George Battersea Reach Limited (Jersey)

St George Blackfriars Limited

St George Central London Limited (2)

St George North London Limited (2)

St George PLC 

St George South London Limited (2) 

St George West London Limited (2)

St James (Grosvenor Dock) Limited

St James Group Limited 

St James Homes Limited

St James (West London) Limited 

The Berkeley Group plc (3)

The Tower, One St George Wharf Limited

As at 30 April 

Fixed assets
Investments 

Current assets
Debtors 

Cash at bank and in hand 

Current liabilities
Creditors (amounts falling due within one year) 

Net current liabilities 

Total assets less current liabilities and net assets 

Capital and reserves
Called-up share capital 

Share premium account 

Capital redemption reserve 

Profit and loss account 

Total shareholders’ funds 

Notes 

2014 
£m 

2013 
£m

C5 

C6 

C7 

C8 

C9 

C9 

C9 

C10 

1,397.0 
1,397.0 

 1,395.1

 1,395.1

6.0 
0.9 
6.9 

(622.9) 
(616.0) 
781.0 

6.8 
49.3 
24.5 
700.4 
781.0 

 8.3

 0.9

 9.2

(680.4)

(671.2)

 723.9

 6.7

 49.3

 24.5

 643.4

 723.9

F
I
N
A
N
C
I
A
L
S

The financial statements on pages 115 to 119 were approved by the board of directors on 11 July 2014 and were signed on its behalf by:

(3) The Berkeley Group plc is the only direct subsidiary of the Parent Company and is an intermediate holding company

N G SIMPKIN
FINANCE DIRECTOR

Other activities

BRP Investments No.1 Limited (Jersey)

BRP Investments No.2 Limited (Jersey)

(b) Joint Ventures

At 30 April 2014 the Group had an interest in the following joint ventures which have been equity accounted to 30 April, have an accounting date of 30 April and are 
registered and operate in England and Wales and which are 50% owned:

St Edward Homes Limited 

St Edward Homes Partnership 

The St Edward (Strand) Partnership  

Principal activity 

Residential-led mixed-use development

Residential-led mixed-use development

Residential-led mixed-use development

114

115

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  FINANCIALS 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

C1 ACCOUNTING POLICIES
BASIS OF PREPARATION
These financial statements have been prepared under the historical cost convention and in accordance with the Companies Act 2006, where applicable, and 
applicable accounting standards in the United Kingdom (United Kingdom Generally Accepted Accounting Practice) and on the going concern basis. The principal 
accounting policies are set out below and have been applied consistently throughout the year.

The principal activity of The Berkeley Group Holdings plc (“the Company”) is to act as a holding company.

The Company has not presented its own profit and loss account as permitted by Section 408 of the Companies Act 2006.

The Company has not presented its own statement of total recognised gains and losses for the year as there are no separate gains or losses arising in the year.

GOING CONCERN
The Group’s business activities together with the factors likely to affect its future development performance and position are set out in the Business Review. The 
financial position of the Group, its cash flows, liquidity position and borrowing facilities are all described in the Trading and Financial Reviews on pages 38 to 42. 

The Group has significant financial resources and the Directors have assessed the future funding requirements of the Group, including the repayment of £1.7 billion to 
shareholders by 2021, and compared this to the level of committed loan facilities and cash resources over the medium term. In making this assessment consideration 
has been given to the uncertainty inherent in future financial forecasts and where applicable reasonable sensitivities have been applied to the key factors affecting the 
financial performance of the Group. 

Based on the financial performance of the Group, the Directors have a reasonable expectation that the Company has adequate resources to continue its operational 
existence for the foreseeable future, notwithstanding its net current liability position of £616.0m (30 April 2013: £671.2m). For this reason they continue to adopt the 
going concern basis of accounting in preparing the annual financial statements. 

EXPENDITURE
Expenditure is recognised in respect of goods and services received when supplied in accordance with contractual terms. Provision is made when an obligation exists 
for a future liability in respect of a past event and where the amount of the obligation can be reliably estimated.

PENSIONS
Pension contributions under defined contribution schemes are charged to the income statement as they fall due.

INVESTMENTS
Investments in subsidiary undertakings are included in the balance sheet at cost less provision for any impairment.

DEFERRED TAXATION
Deferred tax is recognised in respect of all timing differences that have originated but not reversed at the balance sheet date, where transactions or events that result 
in an obligation to pay more tax in the future or a right to pay less tax in the future have occurred at the balance sheet date.

A net deferred tax asset is recognised as recoverable and therefore recognised only when, on the basis of all available evidence, it can be regarded as more likely than 
not that there will be suitable taxable profits against which to recover carried forward tax losses and from which the future reversal of underlying timing differences can 
be deducted.

Deferred tax is measured at the average tax rates that are expected to apply in the periods in which the timing differences are expected to reverse, based on tax rates 
and laws that have been enacted or substantively enacted by the balance sheet date. Deferred tax is measured on an undiscounted basis.

SHARE-BASED PAYMENTS
The Company operates three equity-settled, share-based compensation plans. The fair value of the employee services received in exchange for the grant of the 
options is recognised as an expense. The total amount to be expensed over the vesting period is determined by reference to the fair value of the options granted.  
At each balance sheet date, the Company revises its estimates of the number of options that are expected to vest. It recognises the impact of the revision to original 
estimates, if any, in the profit and loss account, with a corresponding adjustment to equity.

The proceeds received net of any directly attributable transaction costs are credited to share capital (nominal value) and share premium when the options are 
exercised.

DIVIDENDS
Dividend distributions to shareholders are recognised as a liability in the period in which the dividends are appropriately authorised and approved for payout and are 
no longer at the discretion of the Company. Unpaid dividends that do not meet these criteria are disclosed in the notes to the financial statements.

C2 PROFIT/(LOSS) ON ORDINARY ACTIVITIES BEFORE TAXATION
Profit/(loss) on ordinary activities before taxation is stated after charging the following amounts:

Previous auditors’ remuneration – audit fees 

Current auditors’ remuneration – audit fees 

2014 
£m 
– 
0.1 

2013 
 £m 

0.1

–

No disclosure of other non-audit services has been made as this is included within note 4 of the consolidated financial statements.

C3 DIRECTORS AND EMPLOYEES

Staff costs 

Wages and salaries 

Social security costs 

Share-based payments 

2014 
£m 

15.0 
10.0 
1.4 
26.4 

2013 
 £m 

4.5

10.2

7.8

22.5

The average monthly number of persons employed by the company during the year was 9, all of whom are Directors (2013: 9).

DIRECTORS
Details of Directors’ emoluments are set out in the Remuneration Report on pages 56 to 80.

PENSIONS
During the year, the Company participated in one of the Group’s pension schemes, The Berkeley Group plc Group Personal Pension Plan. Further details on this 
scheme are set out in note 5 of the Consolidated Financial Statements. Contributions amounting to £48,150 (2013: £46,800) were paid into the defined contribution 
scheme during the year.

SHARE-BASED PAYMENTS
The charge to the income statement in respect of share-based payments in the year, relating to grants of shares; share options and notional shares awarded under the 
2009 Long-Term Incentive Plan and the 2011 Long-Term Incentive Plan was £1.4m (2013: £7.8m). Further information on the Company’s share incentive schemes are 
included in the Remuneration Report on pages 56 to 80 as well as note 5 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

C4 THE BERKELEY GROUP HOLDINGS PLC PROFIT AND LOSS ACCOUNT
The profit for the year in the Company is £248.9m (2013: loss of £39.4m).

C5 INVESTMENTS

Investments in shares of subsidiary undertaking at cost at 1 May 

Additions 

Investment in shares of subsidiary undertaking at cost at 30 April 

2014 
£m 
1,395.1 
1.9 
1,397.0 

2013 
 £m 

1,391.3

3.8

 1,395.1

Additions in the year relate to company contributions to the Berkeley Group plc for employee services to be settled through the issue of shares on the vesting of the 
Berkeley Group Holdings plc 2009 Part (a), 2009 Part (b) and 2011 Long Term Incentive Plan awards for the benefit of executive directors of its subsidiaries.

The directors believe that the carrying value of the investments is supported by their underlying net assets.

Details of principal subsidiaries are given within note 28 of the Consolidated Financial Statements.

C6 DEBTORS

Current 

Deferred tax 

The movements on the deferred tax asset are as follows:

At 1 May 

Deferred tax in respect of employee share schemes credited to reserves 

Realisation of deferred tax asset on vesting of employee share scheme 

At 30 April 

2014 
£m 

6.0 

2014 
£m 
8.3 
1.1 
(3.4) 
6.0 

2013 
 £m 

8.3

2013 
 £m 

4.5

3.8

–

8.3

Deferred tax is calculated in full on temporary differences under the liability method using a tax rate of 21% or 20% (2013: 23%). There is no unprovided deferred tax 
(2013: nil).

The deferred tax asset of £6.0m relates to short-term timing differences (2013: £8.3m).

The Autumn Statement (December 2013) and the draft Finance Bill 2014 include legislation to reduce the main rate of corporation tax to 21% for the financial year 
commencing 1 April 2015. The charge has been substantively enacted at the balance sheet date and, therefore, has been reflected in the financial statements.

116

117

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  FINANCIALSBERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  FINANCIALSFINANCIALS 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS continued

C7 CREDITORS: AMOUNTS FALLING DUE WITHIN ONE YEAR

C10 RECONCILIATION OF MOVEMENTS IN SHAREHOLDERS’ FUNDS

Amounts owed to subsidiary undertakings 

Other taxation and social security 

2014 
£m 
(612.7) 
(10.2) 
(622.9) 

2013 
 £m

(666.1)

(14.3)

(680.4)

All amounts included above are unsecured. The interest rate on £601m (2013: £601m) of the balance owed to subsidiary undertakings is 4.0% (2013: 4.0%).  
At 30 April 2014 all other amounts owed to subsidiary undertakings are at floating rates linked to LIBOR and have no fixed repayment date.

Profit/(loss) for the financial year 

Dividends paid 

Equity settlement of employee share schemes 

Credit in respect of employee share scheme 

Opening equity shareholders’ funds 

Closing equity shareholders’ funds 

2014 
£m 
248.9 
(195.2) 
0.1 
3.3 
57.1 
723.9 
781.0 

2013 
 £m 

(39.4)

(19.7)

–

11.7

(47.4)

771.3

723.9

C8 CALLED-UP SHARE CAPITAL 
The authorised share capital of the Company in the year was as follows:

At 30 April

Ordinary share capital 

Redeemable preference shares of £1 each 

2014 
Number ‘000 

2013 
 Number ‘000 

925,000 
50 

925,000

50

C11 DIVIDENDS PER SHARE
The dividends paid in 2014 were a total of £195.2 million, £77.2 million in September 2013 (59 pence per share) and £118.0 million in January 2014 (90 pence per share) 
(2013: £19.7 million, 15 pence per share). A further interim dividend of £121.7 million (90 pence per share) has been declared for payment on 26 September 2014. 
These financial statements do not reflect this further interim dividend. 

C12 RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS
The Company is exempt under the terms of Financial Reporting Standard 8 “Related party disclosures” from disclosing related party transactions with entities that are 
part of The Berkeley Group Holdings plc or investees of The Berkeley Group Holdings plc. 

Each ordinary share of 5p is a voting share in the capital of the Company, is entitled to participate in the profits of the Company and on a winding-up is entitled to 
participate in the assets of the Company.

The movements on allotted and fully paid share capital for the Company in the year were as follows:

Issued

At start of year 

Issued in year 

At end of year 

2014 
No ‘000 

134,857 
500 
135,357 

 Ordinary shares 
2013 
No ‘000 

134,857 

– 

134,857 

 Share Capital 
2013 
£m 

2014 
£m 

6.7 
0.1 
6.8 

6.7 

– 

6.7 

 Share Premium 
2013 
£m

49.3

–

49.3

2014 
£m 

49.3 
– 
49.3 

Each ordinary share of 5p is a voting share in the capital of the Company, is entitled to participate in the profits of the Company and on a winding-up is entitled to 
participate in the assets of the Company.

On 29 January 2014, the company transferred 3.6 million shares (2013: nil), held as ‘treasury shares’, to the Employee Benefit Trust.

On 31 January 2014, 0.5 million ordinary shares (2013: nil) were allotted and issued to the Employee Benefit Trust.

On 31 January 2014, 4.2 million ordinary shares (2013: nil) were transferred from the Employee Benefit Trust to Executive Directors to satisfy the exercise of options 
under the 2009a Long Term Incentive Plan.

At 30 April 2014 there were no shares held as ‘treasury shares’ (2013: 3.6m). 

At 30 April 2014 there were 0.1m shares held in trust (2013: 0.2m). The market value of these shares at 30 April 2014 was £2.4m (2013: £4.9m).

The movements in the year are disclosed in note 20 of the Consolidated Financial Statements.

C9 RESERVES

At 1 May 2013 

Profit for the financial year 

Dividends paid 

Credit in respect of employee share schemes 

At 30 April 2014 

Share 
premium account 
£m 

49.3 

– 

–  

– 

49.3 

Capital  
redemption 
reserve 
£m 

24.5 

– 

– 

– 

24.5 

Profit and 
loss account 
£m 

643.4 

248.9 

(195.2) 

3.3 

700.4 

Total 
£m 

717.2

248.9

(195.2)

3.3

774.2

118

119

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  FINANCIALSBERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  FINANCIALSFINANCIALS 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  FINANCIALS

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  FINANCIALS
BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2014  /  FINANCIALS

FIVE YEAR SUMMARY

FINANCIAL DIARY
FINANCIAL DIARY

Years ended 30 April 

Income statement
Revenue  

Operating profit 

Share of results of joint ventures 

Net finance (costs)/income 

Profit before taxation 

Taxation 

Profit after taxation 

Profit attributable to:

Shareholders 

Non-controlling interest 

Basic earnings per ordinary share 

Statement of financial position
Capital employed 

Net cash/(debt) 

Net assets 

Non-controlling interest 

Shareholders’ funds 

2014 
£m 

2013 
£m 

2012 
£m 

2011 
£m 

2010 
£m 

1,620.6 

1,372.6 

1,041.1 

742.6 

615.3

374.8 
12.1 
(6.9) 
380.0 
(87.1) 
292.9 

292.9 
– 
292.9 
221.8p 

280.1 

(1.3) 

(8.1) 

270.7 

(61.0) 

209.7 

209.7 

– 

209.7 

160.0p 

226.4 

(2.2) 

(9.4) 

214.8 

(56.7) 

158.1 

158.5 

(0.4) 

158.1 

121.0p 

1,157.7 

(57.9) 

1,099.8 

– 

1,099.8 

839p 

21.9% 

15.6% 

21.2% 

3,565 

135.7 

2.1 

(1.5) 

136.3 

(41.8) 

94.5 

95.1 

(0.6) 

94.5 

72.1p 

891.8 

42.0 

933.8 

(4.4) 

929.4 

709p 

19.2% 

 10.6% 

15.3% 

2,544 

106.2

(0.2)

4.4

110.4

(30.8)

79.6

 79.7

(0.1)

79.6

60.0p

545.4

316.9

862.3

(3.7)

858.6

637p

20.1%

9.6%

13.3%

2,201

1,277.7 

1,312.1 
129.2 
1,441.3 
– 
– 
TO BE REPLACED WITH TP PAGE
1,322.4 
1,441.3 
1,009p 
1,066p 

1,322.4 

44.7 

Net assets per share attributable to shareholders (1) 

Ratios and statistics

Return on capital employed (2) 

Return on equity after tax (3) 

Return on equity before tax (4) 

Units sold (5) 

29.9% 
21.2% 
27.5% 
3,742 

22.9% 

17.3% 

22.4% 

3,712 

(1) Net assets attributable to shareholders divided by the number of shares in issue excluding shares held in treasury and shares held by the employee benefit trust.

(2) Calculated as profit before interest and taxation (including joint venture (loss)/profit before tax) divided by the average net assets adjusted for (debt)/cash.

(3) Calculated as profit after taxation attributable to shareholders as a percentage of the average of opening and closing shareholders’ funds.

(4) Calculated as profit before taxation attributable to shareholders as a percentage of the average of opening and closing shareholders’ funds.

(5) The number of units completed and taken to sales in the year excluding joint ventures.

Annual General Meeting and Interim Management Statement 
Annual General Meeting and Interim Management Statement 
Half Year End 
Half Year End 
Interim Results Announcement for the six months ending 31 October 2014 
Interim Results Announcement for the six months ending 31 October 2014 
Interim Management Statement 
Interim Management Statement 
Year End 
Year End 
Preliminary Announcement of Results for the year ending 30 April 2015 
Preliminary Announcement of Results for the year ending 30 April 2015 
Publication of 2015 Annual Report 
Publication of 2015 Annual Report 

REGISTERED OFFICE AND ADVISORS
REGISTERED OFFICE AND ADVISORS

1 September 2014
1 September 2014
31 October 2014
31 October 2014
5 December 2014
5 December 2014
March 2015
March 2015
30 April 2015
30 April 2015
June 2015
June 2015
August 2015
 August 2015

F
I
N
A
N
C
I
A
L
S

BANKERS 
Barclays Bank PLC 
Lloyds TSB Bank plc 
Santander UK plc 
Svenska Handelsbanken AB (Publ) 
The Royal Bank of Scotland Plc

AUDITORS 
KPMG LLP

REGISTERED OFFICE AND PRINCIPAL PLACE OF BUSINESS
Berkeley House 
REGISTERED OFFICE AND  
PRINCIPAL PLACE OF BUSINESS 
19 Portsmouth Road 
Berkeley House 
Cobham 
19 Portsmouth Road 
Surrey KT11 1JG 
Cobham 
Registered number: 5172586
Surrey KT11 1JG 
Registered number: 5172586
REGISTRARS
Capita Registrars 
REGISTRARS 
The Registry 
Capita Registrars 
40 Dukes Place 
The Registry 
London EC3A 7NH 
40 Dukes Place 
Tel: 0870 162 3100
London EC3A 7NH 
Tel: 0870 162 3100

CORPORATE BROKER AND  
FINANCIAL ADVISOR 
UBS Investment Bank

SHARE PRICE INFORMATION 
The Company’s share capital is listed on  
the London Stock Exchange. The latest  
share price is available via the Company’s 
website at www.berkeleygroup.co.uk

SOLICITORS 
Herbert Smith Freehills LLP 

CORPORATE BROKER AND FINANCIAL ADVISOR
UBS Investment Bank

SHARE PRICE INFORMATION
The Company’s share capital is listed on the London Stock Exchange. 
The latest share price is available via the Company’s website at www.berkeleygroup.co.uk

SOLICITORS
Herbert Smith Freehills LLP

BANKERS
Barclays Bank PLC 
Lloyds TSB Bank plc 
Santander UK plc 
Svenska Handelsbanken AB (Publ) 
The Royal Bank of Scotland Plc

AUDITORS
KPMG LLP

120
120

121
121